1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2026 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <linux/lockdep.h> 22 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 23 #include <net/codel.h> 24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 25 #include <linux/unaligned.h> 26 27 /** 28 * DOC: Introduction 29 * 30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 33 * drivers. 34 */ 35 36 /** 37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 38 * 39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 40 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 43 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 44 * tasklet function. 45 * 46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 47 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 48 */ 49 50 /** 51 * DOC: Warning 52 * 53 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 55 */ 56 57 /** 58 * DOC: Frame format 59 * 60 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 63 * hardware. 64 * 65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 66 * 67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 69 * 70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 72 */ 73 74 /** 75 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 76 * 77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 81 * 82 * mac80211 will flush the workqueue upon interface removal and during 83 * suspend. 84 * 85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 86 * 87 */ 88 89 /** 90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 91 * 92 * mac80211 uses an intermediate queueing implementation, designed to allow the 93 * driver to keep hardware queues short and to provide some fairness between 94 * different stations/interfaces. 95 * 96 * Drivers must provide the .wake_tx_queue driver operation by either 97 * linking it to ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() or implementing a custom 98 * handler. 99 * 100 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 101 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 102 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 103 * 104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 106 * 107 * The driver can't access the internal TX queues (iTXQs) directly. 108 * Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue 109 * driver op. 110 * Drivers implementing a custom .wake_tx_queue op can get them by calling 111 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Drivers using ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() will 112 * simply get the individual frames pushed via the .tx driver operation. 113 * 114 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 115 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 116 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 117 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 118 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 119 * 120 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 121 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 122 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 123 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 124 * .release_buffered_frames(). 125 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 126 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 127 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 128 */ 129 130 /** 131 * DOC: HW timestamping 132 * 133 * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps 134 * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks. 135 * 136 * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing 137 * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp 138 * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the 139 * ieee80211_rx_status struct. 140 * 141 * Similarly, to report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine 142 * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field 143 * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the 144 * ieee80211_tx_status struct. 145 */ 146 struct device; 147 148 /** 149 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 150 * 151 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 152 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 153 */ 154 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 155 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 156 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 157 }; 158 159 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 160 161 /** 162 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 163 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 164 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 165 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 166 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 167 */ 168 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 169 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 170 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 171 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 172 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 173 }; 174 175 /** 176 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 177 * 178 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 179 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 180 * 181 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 182 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 183 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 184 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 185 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 186 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 187 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 188 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 189 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 190 */ 191 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 192 u16 txop; 193 u16 cw_min; 194 u16 cw_max; 195 u8 aifs; 196 bool acm; 197 bool uapsd; 198 bool mu_edca; 199 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 200 }; 201 202 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 203 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 204 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 205 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 206 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 207 }; 208 209 /** 210 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 211 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 212 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 213 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 214 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 215 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 216 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_DEF: The min chandef changed 217 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_AP: The AP channel definition changed, so (wider 218 * bandwidth) OFDMA settings need to be changed 219 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_PUNCTURING: The punctured channel(s) bitmap 220 * was changed. 221 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_NPCA: NPCA configuration changed 222 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_NPCA_PUNCT: NPCA puncturing changed 223 */ 224 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 225 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 226 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 227 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 228 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 229 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_DEF = BIT(4), 230 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_AP = BIT(5), 231 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_PUNCTURING = BIT(6), 232 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_NPCA = BIT(7), 233 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_NPCA_PUNCT = BIT(8), 234 }; 235 236 /** 237 * struct ieee80211_chan_req - A channel "request" 238 * @oper: channel definition to use for operation 239 * @ap: the channel definition of the AP, if any 240 * (otherwise the chan member is %NULL) 241 * @require_npca: If NPCA is configured, require it to 242 * remain, this is used by AP interfaces 243 */ 244 struct ieee80211_chan_req { 245 struct cfg80211_chan_def oper; 246 struct cfg80211_chan_def ap; 247 bool require_npca; 248 }; 249 250 /** 251 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 252 * 253 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 254 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 255 * 256 * @def: the channel definition 257 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 258 * @ap: the channel definition the AP actually is operating as, 259 * for use with (wider bandwidth) OFDMA 260 * @radio_idx: index of the wiphy radio used used for this channel 261 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 262 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 263 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 264 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 265 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 266 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 267 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 268 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 269 */ 270 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 271 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 272 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 273 struct cfg80211_chan_def ap; 274 275 int radio_idx; 276 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 277 278 bool radar_enabled; 279 280 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 281 }; 282 283 /** 284 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 285 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 286 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 287 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 288 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 289 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 290 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 291 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 292 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 293 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 294 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 295 * for changes/removal.) 296 */ 297 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 298 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 299 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 300 }; 301 302 /** 303 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 304 * 305 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 306 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 307 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 308 * done. 309 * 310 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 311 * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching 312 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 313 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 314 */ 315 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 316 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 317 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf; 318 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 319 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 320 }; 321 322 /** 323 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 324 * 325 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed() 326 * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed. 327 * 328 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 329 * also implies a change in the AID. 330 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 331 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 332 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 333 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 334 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 335 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 336 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 337 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 338 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 339 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 340 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 341 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 342 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 343 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 344 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 345 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 346 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 347 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 348 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 349 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 350 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 351 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 352 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 353 * changed 354 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 355 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 356 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 357 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 358 * context had been assigned. 359 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 360 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 361 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 362 * keep alive) changed. 363 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 364 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 365 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 366 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 367 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 368 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 369 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed. 370 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 371 * status changed. 372 * @BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS: MLD valid links status changed. 373 * @BSS_CHANGED_MLD_TTLM: negotiated TID to link mapping was changed 374 * @BSS_CHANGED_TPE: transmit power envelope changed 375 * @BSS_CHANGED_NAN_LOCAL_SCHED: NAN local schedule changed (NAN mode only) 376 * @BSS_CHANGED_NPCA: NPCA parameters changed 377 */ 378 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 379 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 380 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 381 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 382 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 383 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 384 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 385 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 386 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 387 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 388 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 389 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 390 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 391 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 392 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 393 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 394 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 395 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 396 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 397 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 398 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 399 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 400 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 401 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 402 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 403 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 404 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 405 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 406 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 407 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 408 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 409 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30, 410 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = BIT_ULL(31), 411 BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS = BIT_ULL(33), 412 BSS_CHANGED_MLD_TTLM = BIT_ULL(34), 413 BSS_CHANGED_TPE = BIT_ULL(35), 414 BSS_CHANGED_NAN_LOCAL_SCHED = BIT_ULL(36), 415 BSS_CHANGED_NPCA = BIT_ULL(37), 416 417 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 418 }; 419 420 /* 421 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 422 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 423 * filtering will be disabled. 424 */ 425 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 426 427 /** 428 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 429 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 430 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 431 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 432 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 433 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 434 * once each time the timeout triggers. 435 */ 436 enum ieee80211_event_type { 437 RSSI_EVENT, 438 MLME_EVENT, 439 BAR_RX_EVENT, 440 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 441 }; 442 443 /** 444 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 445 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 446 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 447 */ 448 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 449 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 450 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 451 }; 452 453 /** 454 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 455 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 456 */ 457 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 458 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 459 }; 460 461 /** 462 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 463 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 464 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 465 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 466 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 467 */ 468 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 469 AUTH_EVENT, 470 ASSOC_EVENT, 471 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 472 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 473 }; 474 475 /** 476 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 477 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 478 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 479 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 480 */ 481 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 482 MLME_SUCCESS, 483 MLME_DENIED, 484 MLME_TIMEOUT, 485 }; 486 487 /** 488 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 489 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 490 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 491 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 492 */ 493 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 494 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 495 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 496 u16 reason; 497 }; 498 499 /** 500 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 501 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 502 * @tid: the tid 503 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 504 */ 505 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 506 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 507 u16 tid; 508 u16 ssn; 509 }; 510 511 /** 512 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 513 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 514 * @u.rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 515 * @u.mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 516 * @u.ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 517 * @u:union holding the fields above 518 */ 519 struct ieee80211_event { 520 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 521 union { 522 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 523 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 524 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 525 } u; 526 }; 527 528 /** 529 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 530 * 531 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 532 * 533 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 534 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 535 */ 536 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 537 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 538 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 539 }; 540 541 /** 542 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 543 * 544 * @lci: LCI subelement content 545 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 546 * @lci_len: LCI data length 547 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 548 */ 549 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 550 const u8 *lci; 551 const u8 *civicloc; 552 size_t lci_len; 553 size_t civicloc_len; 554 }; 555 556 /** 557 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from 558 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail. 559 * 560 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 561 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 562 */ 563 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery { 564 u32 min_interval; 565 u32 max_interval; 566 }; 567 568 #define IEEE80211_TPE_EIRP_ENTRIES_320MHZ 5 569 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_eirp { 570 bool valid; 571 s8 power[IEEE80211_TPE_EIRP_ENTRIES_320MHZ]; 572 u8 count; 573 }; 574 575 #define IEEE80211_TPE_PSD_ENTRIES_320MHZ 16 576 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_psd { 577 bool valid; 578 s8 power[IEEE80211_TPE_PSD_ENTRIES_320MHZ]; 579 u8 count, n; 580 }; 581 582 /** 583 * struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe - parsed transmit power envelope information 584 * @max_local: maximum local EIRP, one value for 20, 40, 80, 160, 320 MHz each 585 * (indexed by TX power category) 586 * @max_reg_client: maximum regulatory client EIRP, one value for 20, 40, 80, 587 * 160, 320 MHz each 588 * (indexed by TX power category) 589 * @psd_local: maximum local power spectral density, one value for each 20 MHz 590 * subchannel per bss_conf's chanreq.oper 591 * (indexed by TX power category) 592 * @psd_reg_client: maximum regulatory power spectral density, one value for 593 * each 20 MHz subchannel per bss_conf's chanreq.oper 594 * (indexed by TX power category) 595 */ 596 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe { 597 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_eirp max_local[2], max_reg_client[2]; 598 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_psd psd_local[2], psd_reg_client[2]; 599 }; 600 601 /** 602 * struct ieee80211_bss_npca_params - NPCA parameters 603 * @min_dur_thresh: NPCA minimum duration threshold (512 + 128*n usec) 604 * @switch_delay: NPCA switch delay (units of 4 usec) 605 * @switch_back_delay: NPCA switch back delay (units of 4 usec) 606 * @init_qsrc: initial QSRC value 607 * @moplen: indicates MOPLEN NPCA is permitted in the BSS 608 * @enabled: NPCA is enabled for this link 609 * 610 * Note: the individual values (except @enabled) are in spec representation. 611 */ 612 struct ieee80211_bss_npca_params { 613 u32 min_dur_thresh:4, 614 switch_delay:6, 615 switch_back_delay:6, 616 init_qsrc:2, 617 moplen:1, 618 enabled:1; 619 }; 620 621 /** 622 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 623 * 624 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 625 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 626 * 627 * @vif: reference to owning VIF 628 * @bss: the cfg80211 bss descriptor. Valid only for a station, and only 629 * when associated. Note: This contains information which is not 630 * necessarily authenticated. For example, information coming from probe 631 * responses. 632 * @addr: (link) address used locally 633 * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO 634 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 635 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 636 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 637 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 638 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 639 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 640 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 641 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 642 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 643 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT 644 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 645 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 646 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 647 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 648 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 649 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 650 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 651 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 652 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 653 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 654 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 655 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 656 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 657 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 658 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 659 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 660 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 661 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 662 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 663 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 664 * Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't 665 * know how to track beacons for all of the links for this. 666 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 667 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 668 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 669 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 670 * the current band. 671 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 672 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 673 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 674 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 675 * @chanreq: Channel request for this BSS -- the hardware might be 676 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 677 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 678 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 679 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 680 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 681 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 682 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 683 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 684 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 685 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 686 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 687 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 688 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 689 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 690 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 691 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 692 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 693 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 694 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 695 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 696 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 697 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 698 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 699 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 700 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 701 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 702 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 703 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 704 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 705 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 706 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 707 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 708 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 709 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 710 * station. 711 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 712 * responder functionality. 713 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 714 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 715 * @tx_bss_conf: Pointer to the BSS configuration of transmitting interface 716 * if MBSSID is enabled. This pointer is RCU-protected due to CSA finish 717 * and BSS color change flows accessing it. 718 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 719 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 720 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 721 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 722 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 723 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 724 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 725 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are 726 * connected to (STA) 727 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 728 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 729 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration 730 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 731 * interval. 732 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed 733 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware. 734 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz 735 * @tpe: transmit power envelope information 736 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS. 737 * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT 738 * @epcs_support: does this BSS support EPCS 739 * @uhr_support: does this BSS support UHR 740 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. 741 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 742 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 743 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 744 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 745 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 746 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 747 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. 748 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change. 749 * @ht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HT LDPC capability. 750 * @vht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has VHT LDPC capability. 751 * @he_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HE LDPC capability. 752 * @vht_su_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU 753 * beamformer 754 * @vht_su_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU 755 * beamformee 756 * @vht_mu_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU 757 * beamformer 758 * @vht_mu_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU 759 * beamformee 760 * @he_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU 761 * beamformer 762 * @he_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU 763 * beamformee 764 * @he_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE MU 765 * beamformer 766 * @he_full_ul_mumimo: does this BSS support the reception (AP) or transmission 767 * (non-AP STA) of an HE TB PPDU on an RU that spans the entire PPDU 768 * bandwidth 769 * @eht_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU 770 * beamformer 771 * @eht_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU 772 * beamformee 773 * @eht_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT MU 774 * beamformer 775 * @eht_80mhz_full_bw_ul_mumimo: in AP-mode, does this BSS support the 776 * reception of an EHT TB PPDU on an RU that spans the entire PPDU 777 * bandwidth 778 * @eht_disable_mcs15: disable EHT-MCS 15 reception capability. 779 * @bss_param_ch_cnt: in BSS-mode, the BSS params change count. This 780 * information is the latest known value. It can come from this link's 781 * beacon or from a beacon sent by another link. 782 * @bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id: in BSS-mode, the link_id to which the beacon 783 * that updated &bss_param_ch_cnt belongs. E.g. if link 1 doesn't hear 784 * its beacons, and link 2 sent a beacon with an RNR element that updated 785 * link 1's BSS params change count, then, link 1's 786 * bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id will be 2. That means that link 1 knows that 787 * link 2 was the link that updated its bss_param_ch_cnt value. 788 * In case link 1 hears its beacon again, bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id will 789 * be updated to 1, even if bss_param_ch_cnt didn't change. This allows 790 * the link to know that it heard the latest value from its own beacon 791 * (as opposed to hearing its value from another link's beacon). 792 * @enh_bss_param_ch_cnt: In BSS-mode, the enhanced BSS parameters change 793 * counter. See @bss_param_ch_cnt, it works the same way. 794 * @enh_bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id: In BSS-mode, the link_id for the enhanced 795 * BSS parameter change counter, see @bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id. 796 * @s1g_long_beacon_period: number of beacon intervals between each long 797 * beacon transmission. 798 * @npca: NPCA parameters 799 */ 800 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 801 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 802 struct cfg80211_bss *bss; 803 804 const u8 *bssid; 805 unsigned int link_id; 806 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 807 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 808 bool uora_exists; 809 u8 uora_ocw_range; 810 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 811 bool he_support; 812 bool twt_requester; 813 bool twt_responder; 814 bool twt_broadcast; 815 /* erp related data */ 816 bool use_cts_prot; 817 bool use_short_preamble; 818 bool use_short_slot; 819 bool enable_beacon; 820 u8 dtim_period; 821 u16 beacon_int; 822 u16 assoc_capability; 823 u64 sync_tsf; 824 u32 sync_device_ts; 825 u8 sync_dtim_count; 826 u32 basic_rates; 827 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 828 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 829 u16 ht_operation_mode; 830 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 831 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 832 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 833 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 834 struct ieee80211_chan_req chanreq; 835 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 836 bool qos; 837 bool hidden_ssid; 838 int txpower; 839 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 840 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 841 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 842 u16 max_idle_period; 843 bool protected_keep_alive; 844 bool ftm_responder; 845 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 846 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 847 bool nontransmitted; 848 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *tx_bss_conf; 849 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 850 u8 bssid_index; 851 u8 bssid_indicator; 852 bool ema_ap; 853 u8 profile_periodicity; 854 struct { 855 u32 params; 856 u16 nss_set; 857 } he_oper; 858 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 859 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 860 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery; 861 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval; 862 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate; 863 enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type; 864 865 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe tpe; 866 867 u8 pwr_reduction; 868 bool eht_support; 869 bool epcs_support; 870 bool uhr_support; 871 872 bool csa_active; 873 874 bool mu_mimo_owner; 875 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 876 877 bool color_change_active; 878 u8 color_change_color; 879 880 bool ht_ldpc; 881 bool vht_ldpc; 882 bool he_ldpc; 883 bool vht_su_beamformer; 884 bool vht_su_beamformee; 885 bool vht_mu_beamformer; 886 bool vht_mu_beamformee; 887 bool he_su_beamformer; 888 bool he_su_beamformee; 889 bool he_mu_beamformer; 890 bool he_full_ul_mumimo; 891 bool eht_su_beamformer; 892 bool eht_su_beamformee; 893 bool eht_mu_beamformer; 894 bool eht_80mhz_full_bw_ul_mumimo; 895 bool eht_disable_mcs15; 896 897 u8 bss_param_ch_cnt; 898 u8 bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id; 899 u8 enh_bss_param_ch_cnt; 900 u8 enh_bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id; 901 902 u8 s1g_long_beacon_period; 903 904 struct ieee80211_bss_npca_params npca; 905 }; 906 907 #define IEEE80211_NAN_MAX_CHANNELS 3 908 909 /** 910 * struct ieee80211_nan_channel - NAN channel information 911 * 912 * @chanreq: channel request for this NAN channel. Even though this chanreq::ap 913 * is irrelevant for NAN, still store it for convenience - some functions 914 * require it as an argument. 915 * @needed_rx_chains: number of RX chains needed for this NAN channel 916 * @chanctx_conf: chanctx_conf assigned to this NAN channel. 917 * If a local channel is being ULWed (because we needed this chanctx for 918 * something else), the local NAN channel that used this chanctx, 919 * will have this pointer set to %NULL. 920 * A peer NAN channel should never have this pointer set to %NULL. 921 * @channel_entry: the Channel Entry blob as defined in Wi-Fi Aware 922 * (TM) 4.0 specification Table 100 (Channel Entry format for the NAN 923 * Availability attribute). 924 * @no_evacuate: if set, this channel must not be evacuated 925 */ 926 struct ieee80211_nan_channel { 927 struct ieee80211_chan_req chanreq; 928 u8 needed_rx_chains; 929 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf; 930 u8 channel_entry[6]; 931 bool no_evacuate; 932 }; 933 934 /** 935 * struct ieee80211_nan_peer_map - NAN peer schedule map 936 * 937 * This stores a single map from a peer's schedule. Each peer can have 938 * multiple maps. 939 * 940 * @map_id: the map ID from the peer schedule, %CFG80211_NAN_INVALID_MAP_ID 941 * if unused 942 * @slots: mapping of time slots to channel configurations in the schedule's 943 * channels array 944 */ 945 struct ieee80211_nan_peer_map { 946 u8 map_id; 947 struct ieee80211_nan_channel *slots[CFG80211_NAN_SCHED_NUM_TIME_SLOTS]; 948 }; 949 950 /** 951 * struct ieee80211_nan_peer_sched - NAN peer schedule 952 * 953 * This stores the complete schedule from a peer. Contains peer-level 954 * parameters and an array of schedule maps. 955 * 956 * @seq_id: the sequence ID from the peer schedule 957 * @committed_dw: committed DW as published by the peer 958 * @max_chan_switch: maximum channel switch time in microseconds 959 * @init_ulw: initial ULWs as published by the peer (copied) 960 * @ulw_size: number of bytes in @init_ulw 961 * @maps: array of peer schedule maps. Invalid slots have map_id set to 962 * %CFG80211_NAN_INVALID_MAP_ID. 963 * @n_channels: number of valid channel entries in @channels 964 * @channels: flexible array of negotiated peer channels for this schedule 965 */ 966 struct ieee80211_nan_peer_sched { 967 u8 seq_id; 968 u16 committed_dw; 969 u16 max_chan_switch; 970 const u8 *init_ulw; 971 u16 ulw_size; 972 struct ieee80211_nan_peer_map maps[CFG80211_NAN_MAX_PEER_MAPS]; 973 u8 n_channels; 974 struct ieee80211_nan_channel channels[] __counted_by(n_channels); 975 }; 976 977 /** 978 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 979 * 980 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 981 * 982 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 983 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 984 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 985 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 986 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 987 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 988 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 989 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 990 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 991 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 992 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 993 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 994 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 995 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 996 * station 997 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 998 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 999 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 1000 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 1001 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 1002 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 1003 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 1004 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 1005 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 1006 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 1007 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 1008 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 1009 * hardware queue. 1010 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 1011 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 1012 * is for the whole aggregation. 1013 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 1014 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 1015 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 1016 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 1017 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 1018 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 1019 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 1020 * off-channel operation. 1021 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation 1022 * (header conversion) 1023 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 1024 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 1025 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 1026 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 1027 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 1028 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 1029 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 1030 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 1031 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 1032 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 1033 * queue gets full. 1034 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 1035 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 1036 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 1037 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 1038 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 1039 * should kick the MLME state machine. 1040 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 1041 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 1042 * status to user space) 1043 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 1044 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 1045 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 1046 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 1047 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 1048 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 1049 * handled properly by the device. 1050 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 1051 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 1052 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 1053 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 1054 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 1055 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 1056 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 1057 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 1058 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 1059 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 1060 * PS-Poll responses. 1061 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 1062 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 1063 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 1064 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 1065 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 1066 * monitor injection). 1067 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 1068 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 1069 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 1070 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 1071 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 1072 * 1073 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 1074 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 1075 */ 1076 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 1077 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 1078 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 1079 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 1080 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 1081 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 1082 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 1083 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 1084 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 1085 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 1086 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 1087 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 1088 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 1089 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 1090 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 1091 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14), 1092 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 1093 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 1094 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 1095 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 1096 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 1097 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 1098 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 1099 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 1100 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 1101 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 1102 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 1103 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 1104 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 1105 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 1106 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 1107 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 1108 }; 1109 1110 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 1111 1112 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS 1113 1114 /** 1115 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 1116 * 1117 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 1118 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 1119 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 1120 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 1121 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 1122 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 1123 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 1124 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 1125 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 1126 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 1127 * it can be sent out. 1128 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that 1129 * has already been assigned to this frame. 1130 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered 1131 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent 1132 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values. 1133 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally 1134 * for sequence number assignment 1135 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_USE_RATE_MASK: Don't use rate mask for this frame 1136 * which is transmitted due to scanning or offchannel TX, not in normal 1137 * operation on the interface. 1138 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this 1139 * frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is 1140 * only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is 1141 * also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame 1142 * is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if 1143 * it's intended for an MLD. 1144 * 1145 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 1146 */ 1147 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 1148 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 1149 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 1150 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 1151 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 1152 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 1153 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 1154 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6), 1155 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7), 1156 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8), 1157 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX = BIT(9), 1158 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_USE_RATE_MASK = BIT(10), 1159 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK = 0xf0000000, 1160 }; 1161 1162 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED 0xf 1163 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC \ 1164 u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \ 1165 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK) 1166 1167 /** 1168 * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status 1169 * 1170 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid 1171 * 1172 * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags. 1173 */ 1174 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags { 1175 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0), 1176 }; 1177 1178 /* 1179 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 1180 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 1181 */ 1182 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 1183 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 1184 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 1185 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 1186 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 1187 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 1188 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 1189 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 1190 1191 /** 1192 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 1193 * Rate Control algorithm. 1194 * 1195 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 1196 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 1197 * 1198 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 1199 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 1200 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 1201 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 1202 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 1203 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 1204 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 1205 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 1206 * Greenfield mode. 1207 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 1208 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 1209 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 1210 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 1211 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 1212 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 1213 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 1214 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 1215 */ 1216 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 1217 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 1218 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 1219 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 1220 1221 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 1222 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 1223 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 1224 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 1225 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 1226 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 1227 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 1228 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 1229 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 1230 }; 1231 1232 1233 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 1234 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 1235 1236 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 1237 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 1238 1239 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 1240 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 1241 1242 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 1243 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 1244 1245 /** 1246 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 1247 * 1248 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 1249 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 1250 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 1251 * 1252 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 1253 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 1254 * 1255 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 1256 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 1257 * 1258 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 1259 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 1260 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 1261 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 1262 * information:: 1263 * 1264 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 1265 * 1266 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 1267 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 1268 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 1269 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 1270 * information should then contain:: 1271 * 1272 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 1273 * 1274 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 1275 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 1276 */ 1277 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 1278 s8 idx; 1279 u16 count:5, 1280 flags:11; 1281 } __packed; 1282 1283 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 1284 1285 static inline bool ieee80211_rate_valid(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1286 { 1287 return rate->idx >= 0 && rate->count > 0; 1288 } 1289 1290 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 1291 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 1292 { 1293 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 1294 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 1295 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 1296 } 1297 1298 static inline u8 1299 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1300 { 1301 return rate->idx & 0xF; 1302 } 1303 1304 static inline u8 1305 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1306 { 1307 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 1308 } 1309 1310 /** 1311 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 1312 * 1313 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 1314 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 1315 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 1316 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 1317 * 1318 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 1319 * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races), 1320 * not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which 1321 * link the frame will be transmitted on 1322 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 1323 * @status_data: internal data for TX status handling, assigned privately, 1324 * see also &enum ieee80211_status_data for the internal documentation 1325 * @status_data_idr: indicates status data is IDR allocated ID for ack frame 1326 * @tx_time_mc: TX time estimate is for a multicast frame, used internally 1327 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 1328 * @control: union part for control data 1329 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 1330 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 1331 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 1332 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 1333 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 1334 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 1335 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 1336 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 1337 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 1338 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 1339 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 1340 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 1341 * @pad: padding 1342 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 1343 * @status: union part for status data 1344 * @status.rates: attempted rates 1345 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 1346 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 1347 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 1348 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 1349 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only 1350 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness 1351 * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags 1352 * @status.link_valid: if the link which is identified by @status.link_id is 1353 * valid. This flag is set by the driver in the TX status callback when the 1354 * connection is MLO and the driver knows which link was used for TX. 1355 * @status.link_id: id of the link used to transmit the packet. This is used 1356 * along with @status.link_valid. 1357 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 1358 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 1359 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1360 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1361 */ 1362 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1363 /* common information */ 1364 u32 flags; 1365 u32 band:3, 1366 status_data_idr:1, 1367 status_data:13, 1368 hw_queue:4, 1369 tx_time_mc:1, 1370 tx_time_est:10; 1371 1372 union { 1373 struct { 1374 union { 1375 /* rate control */ 1376 struct { 1377 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1378 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1379 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1380 u8 use_rts:1; 1381 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1382 u8 short_preamble:1; 1383 u8 skip_table:1; 1384 1385 /* for injection only (bitmap) */ 1386 u8 antennas:2; 1387 1388 /* 14 bits free */ 1389 }; 1390 /* only needed before rate control */ 1391 unsigned long jiffies; 1392 }; 1393 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1394 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1395 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1396 u32 flags; 1397 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1398 } control; 1399 struct { 1400 u64 cookie; 1401 } ack; 1402 struct { 1403 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1404 s32 ack_signal; 1405 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1406 u8 ampdu_len; 1407 u8 antenna; 1408 u8 pad; 1409 u16 tx_time; 1410 u8 flags; 1411 u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4; 1412 void *status_driver_data[16 / sizeof(void *)]; 1413 } status; 1414 struct { 1415 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1416 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1417 u8 pad[4]; 1418 1419 void *rate_driver_data[ 1420 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1421 }; 1422 void *driver_data[ 1423 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1424 }; 1425 }; 1426 1427 static inline u16 1428 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1429 { 1430 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1431 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1432 */ 1433 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1434 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1435 } 1436 1437 static inline u16 1438 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1439 { 1440 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1441 } 1442 1443 /*** 1444 * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path 1445 * 1446 * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a 1447 * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet. 1448 * 1449 * @rate_idx The actual used rate. 1450 * @try_count How often the rate was tried. 1451 * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the 1452 * corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level 1453 * that was used when sending the packet. 1454 */ 1455 struct ieee80211_rate_status { 1456 struct rate_info rate_idx; 1457 u8 try_count; 1458 u8 tx_power_idx; 1459 }; 1460 1461 /** 1462 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1463 * 1464 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1465 * @info: Basic tx status information 1466 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1467 * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet 1468 * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates) 1469 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver 1470 * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds 1471 * Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action 1472 * frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1473 */ 1474 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1475 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1476 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1477 struct sk_buff *skb; 1478 struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates; 1479 ktime_t ack_hwtstamp; 1480 u8 n_rates; 1481 1482 struct list_head *free_list; 1483 }; 1484 1485 /** 1486 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1487 * 1488 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1489 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1490 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1491 * 1492 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1493 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1494 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1495 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1496 */ 1497 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1498 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1499 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1500 const u8 *common_ies; 1501 size_t common_ie_len; 1502 }; 1503 1504 1505 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1506 { 1507 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1508 } 1509 1510 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1511 { 1512 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1513 } 1514 1515 /** 1516 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1517 * 1518 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1519 * 1520 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1521 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1522 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1523 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1524 * 1525 * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the 1526 * driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore 1527 * any fields it needs after calling this helper. 1528 */ 1529 static inline void 1530 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1531 { 1532 int i; 1533 1534 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1535 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1536 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1537 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1538 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1539 /* clear the rate counts */ 1540 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1541 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1542 memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates); 1543 } 1544 1545 1546 /** 1547 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1548 * 1549 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1550 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1551 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1552 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1553 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1554 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1555 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1556 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1557 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1558 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1559 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1560 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1561 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1562 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1563 * de-duplication by itself. 1564 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1565 * the frame. 1566 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1567 * the frame. 1568 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1569 * field) is valid if this field is non-zero, and the position 1570 * where the timestamp was sampled depends on the value. 1571 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1572 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1573 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1574 * merging. 1575 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1576 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1577 * (including FCS) was received. 1578 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1579 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1580 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_IS_RTAP_TS64: The timestamp passed in the RX status @mactime 1581 * is only for use in the radiotap timestamp header, not otherwise a valid 1582 * @mactime value. Note this is a separate flag so that we continue to see 1583 * %RX_FLAG_MACTIME as unset. Also note that in this case the timestamp is 1584 * reported to be 64 bits wide, not just 32. 1585 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1586 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1587 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1588 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1589 * each A-MPDU 1590 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1591 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1592 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1593 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1594 * on this subframe 1595 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1596 * done by the hardware 1597 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1598 * processing it in any regular way. 1599 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1600 * them for sniffing purposes. 1601 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1602 * monitor interfaces. 1603 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1604 * them for sniffing purposes. 1605 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1606 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1607 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1608 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1609 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1610 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1611 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1612 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1613 * interleaved with other frames. 1614 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END: This frame contains radiotap TLVs in the 1615 * skb->data (before the 802.11 header). 1616 * If used, the SKB's mac_header pointer must be set to point 1617 * to the 802.11 header after the TLVs, and any padding added after TLV 1618 * data to align to 4 must be cleared by the driver putting the TLVs 1619 * in the skb. 1620 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1621 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1622 * the first subframe. 1623 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1624 * be done in the hardware. 1625 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1626 * frame 1627 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1628 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1629 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1630 * 1631 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1632 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1633 * - DATA3_CODING 1634 * - DATA5_GI 1635 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1636 * - DATA6_NSTS 1637 * - DATA3_STBC 1638 * 1639 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1640 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1641 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1642 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1643 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1644 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1645 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1646 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1647 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by 1648 * hardware or driver) 1649 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VHT: VHT radiotap data is present 1650 */ 1651 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1652 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1653 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1654 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(2), 1655 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1656 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1657 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1658 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1659 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_IS_RTAP_TS64 = BIT(7), 1660 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1661 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1662 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1663 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1664 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1665 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1666 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1667 /* one free bit at 15 */ 1668 RX_FLAG_MACTIME = BIT(16) | BIT(17), 1669 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = 1 << 16, 1670 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = 2 << 16, 1671 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = 3 << 16, 1672 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1673 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1674 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END = BIT(20), 1675 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1676 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1677 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1678 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1679 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1680 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1681 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1682 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1683 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1684 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30), 1685 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VHT = BIT(31), 1686 }; 1687 1688 /** 1689 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1690 * 1691 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1692 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1693 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1694 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1695 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1696 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1697 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1698 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1699 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1700 */ 1701 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1702 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1703 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1704 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1705 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1706 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1707 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1708 }; 1709 1710 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1711 1712 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1713 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1714 RX_ENC_HT, 1715 RX_ENC_VHT, 1716 RX_ENC_HE, 1717 RX_ENC_EHT, 1718 RX_ENC_UHR, 1719 RX_ENC_S1G, 1720 }; 1721 1722 /** 1723 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1724 * 1725 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1726 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1727 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1728 * 1729 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1730 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1731 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1732 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1733 * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only 1734 * needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames. 1735 * Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1736 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1737 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1738 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1739 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1740 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1741 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1742 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz. 1743 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1744 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1745 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1746 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1747 * values were filled. 1748 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1749 * support dB or unspecified units) 1750 * @antenna: antenna used 1751 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1752 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1753 * @nss: number of streams (VHT, HE, EHT and UHR only) 1754 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1755 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1756 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1757 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1758 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1759 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1760 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1761 * @eht: EHT specific rate information 1762 * @eht.ru: EHT RU, from &enum nl80211_eht_ru_alloc 1763 * @eht.gi: EHT GI, from &enum nl80211_eht_gi 1764 * @uhr: UHR specific rate information 1765 * @uhr.ru: UHR RU, from &enum nl80211_eht_ru_alloc 1766 * @uhr.gi: UHR GI, from &enum nl80211_eht_gi 1767 * @uhr.elr: UHR ELR MCS was used 1768 * @uhr.im: UHR interference mitigation was used 1769 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1770 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1771 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1772 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1773 * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. Set and used by 1774 * mac80211 internally, it uses @freq set by the driver to identify the 1775 * correct link per vif. 1776 */ 1777 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1778 u64 mactime; 1779 union { 1780 u64 boottime_ns; 1781 ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp; 1782 }; 1783 u32 device_timestamp; 1784 u32 ampdu_reference; 1785 u32 flag; 1786 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1; 1787 u8 enc_flags; 1788 u8 encoding:3, bw:4; 1789 union { 1790 struct { 1791 u8 he_ru:3; 1792 u8 he_gi:2; 1793 u8 he_dcm:1; 1794 } __packed; 1795 struct { 1796 u8 ru:4; 1797 u8 gi:2; 1798 } __packed eht; 1799 struct { 1800 u8 ru:4; 1801 u8 gi:2; 1802 u8 elr:1; 1803 u8 im:1; 1804 } __packed uhr; 1805 } __packed; 1806 u8 rate_idx; 1807 u8 nss; 1808 u8 rx_flags; 1809 u8 band; 1810 u8 antenna; 1811 s8 signal; 1812 u8 chains; 1813 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1814 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1815 u8 link_id:4; 1816 }; 1817 1818 static_assert(sizeof(struct ieee80211_rx_status) <= sizeof_field(struct sk_buff, cb)); 1819 1820 static inline u32 1821 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status) 1822 { 1823 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) + 1824 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0); 1825 } 1826 1827 /** 1828 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1829 * 1830 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1831 * 1832 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1833 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1834 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1835 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1836 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1837 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1838 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1839 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1840 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1841 * for more. 1842 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1843 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1844 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1845 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1846 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1847 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1848 * operating channel. 1849 */ 1850 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1851 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1852 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1853 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1854 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1855 }; 1856 1857 1858 /** 1859 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1860 * 1861 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1862 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1863 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1864 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1865 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1866 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1867 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1868 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1869 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1870 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1871 */ 1872 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1873 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1874 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1875 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1876 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1877 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1878 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1879 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1880 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1881 }; 1882 1883 /** 1884 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1885 * 1886 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1887 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1888 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1889 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1890 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1891 */ 1892 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1893 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1894 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1895 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1896 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1897 1898 /* keep last */ 1899 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1900 }; 1901 1902 /** 1903 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1904 * 1905 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1906 * 1907 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1908 * 1909 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1910 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1911 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1912 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1913 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1914 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1915 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1916 * 1917 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1918 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1919 * 1920 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1921 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1922 * 1923 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1924 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1925 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1926 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1927 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1928 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1929 * 1930 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1931 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1932 * configured for an HT channel. 1933 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1934 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1935 */ 1936 struct ieee80211_conf { 1937 u32 flags; 1938 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1939 1940 u16 listen_interval; 1941 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1942 1943 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1944 1945 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1946 bool radar_enabled; 1947 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1948 }; 1949 1950 /** 1951 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1952 * 1953 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1954 * operation. 1955 * 1956 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1957 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1958 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1959 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1960 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1961 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1962 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1963 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1964 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1965 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1966 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1967 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1968 * channel, expressed in TU. 1969 * @link_id: the link ID of the link doing the channel switch, 0 for non-MLO 1970 */ 1971 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1972 u64 timestamp; 1973 u32 device_timestamp; 1974 bool block_tx; 1975 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1976 u8 count; 1977 u8 link_id; 1978 u32 delay; 1979 }; 1980 1981 /** 1982 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1983 * 1984 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1985 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1986 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1987 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1988 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1989 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1990 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1991 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1992 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1993 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1994 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1995 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1996 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1997 * @IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE: The driver indicates that EML operation is 1998 * enabled for the interface. 1999 * @IEEE80211_VIF_IGNORE_OFDMA_WIDER_BW: Ignore wider bandwidth OFDMA 2000 * operation on this interface and request a channel context without 2001 * the AP definition. Use this e.g. because the device is able to 2002 * handle OFDMA (downlink and trigger for uplink) on a per-AP basis. 2003 * @IEEE80211_VIF_REMOVE_AP_AFTER_DISASSOC: indicates that the AP sta should 2004 * be removed only after setting the vif as unassociated, and not the 2005 * opposite. Only relevant for STA vifs. 2006 */ 2007 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 2008 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 2009 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 2010 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 2011 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 2012 IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE = BIT(4), 2013 IEEE80211_VIF_IGNORE_OFDMA_WIDER_BW = BIT(5), 2014 IEEE80211_VIF_REMOVE_AP_AFTER_DISASSOC = BIT(6), 2015 }; 2016 2017 2018 /** 2019 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags 2020 * 2021 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled 2022 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211. 2023 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface. 2024 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload 2025 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled 2026 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to 2027 * mac80211. 2028 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_MCAST: tx multicast encapsulation offload is enabled 2029 * The driver supports sending multicast frames passed as 802.3 frames 2030 * by mac80211. 2031 */ 2032 2033 enum ieee80211_offload_flags { 2034 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0), 2035 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1), 2036 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2), 2037 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_MCAST = BIT(3), 2038 }; 2039 2040 #define IEEE80211_NAN_AVAIL_BLOB_MAX_LEN 54 2041 2042 /** 2043 * struct ieee80211_eml_params - EHT Operating mode notification parameters 2044 * 2045 * EML Operating mode notification parameters received in the Operating mode 2046 * notification frame. This struct is used as a container to pass the info to 2047 * the underlay driver. 2048 * 2049 * @link_id: the link ID where the Operating mode notification frame has been 2050 * received. 2051 * @control: EML control field defined in P802.11be section 9.4.1.76. 2052 * @link_bitmap: eMLSR/eMLMR enabled links defined in P802.11be 2053 * section 9.4.1.76. 2054 * @emlmr_mcs_map_count: eMLMR number of valid mcs_map_bw fields according to 2055 * P802.11be section 9.4.1.76 (valid if eMLMR mode control bit is set). 2056 * @emlmr_mcs_map_bw: eMLMR supported MCS and NSS set subfileds defined in 2057 * P802.11be section 9.4.1.76 (valid if eMLMR mode control bit is set). 2058 */ 2059 struct ieee80211_eml_params { 2060 u8 link_id; 2061 u8 control; 2062 u16 link_bitmap; 2063 u8 emlmr_mcs_map_count; 2064 u8 emlmr_mcs_map_bw[9]; 2065 }; 2066 2067 /** 2068 * struct ieee80211_nan_sched_cfg - NAN schedule configuration 2069 * @channels: array of NAN channels. A channel entry is in use if 2070 * channels[i].chanreq.oper.chan is not NULL. 2071 * @schedule: NAN local schedule - mapping of each 16TU time slot to 2072 * the NAN channel on which the radio will operate. NULL if unscheduled. 2073 * @avail_blob: NAN Availability attribute blob. 2074 * @avail_blob_len: length of the @avail_blob in bytes. 2075 * @deferred: indicates that the driver should notify peers before applying the 2076 * new NAN schedule, and apply the new schedule the second NAN Slot 2077 * boundary after it notified the peers, as defined in Wi-Fi Aware (TM) 4.0 2078 * specification, section 5.2.2. 2079 * The driver must call ieee80211_nan_sched_update_done() after the 2080 * schedule has been applied. 2081 * If a HW restart happened while a deferred schedule update was pending, 2082 * mac80211 will reconfigure the deferred schedule (and wait for the driver 2083 * to notify that the schedule has been applied). 2084 */ 2085 struct ieee80211_nan_sched_cfg { 2086 struct ieee80211_nan_channel channels[IEEE80211_NAN_MAX_CHANNELS]; 2087 struct ieee80211_nan_channel *schedule[CFG80211_NAN_SCHED_NUM_TIME_SLOTS]; 2088 u8 avail_blob[IEEE80211_NAN_AVAIL_BLOB_MAX_LEN]; 2089 u16 avail_blob_len; 2090 bool deferred; 2091 }; 2092 2093 /** 2094 * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration 2095 * @assoc: association status 2096 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not 2097 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 2098 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 2099 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 2100 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 2101 * @eml_cap: EML capabilities as described in P802.11be_D4.1 Figure 9-1001j. 2102 * @eml_med_sync_delay: Medium Synchronization delay as described in 2103 * P802.11be_D4.1 Figure 9-1001i. 2104 * @mld_capa_op: MLD Capabilities and Operations per P802.11be_D4.1 2105 * Figure 9-1001k 2106 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 2107 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 2108 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 2109 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 2110 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 2111 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 2112 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 2113 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 2114 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 2115 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format). 2116 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 2117 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 2118 * your driver/device needs to do. 2119 * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections 2120 * (station mode only) 2121 * @nan_sched: NAN schedule parameters. &struct ieee80211_nan_sched_cfg 2122 */ 2123 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg { 2124 /* association related data */ 2125 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 2126 bool ibss_creator; 2127 bool ps; 2128 u16 aid; 2129 u16 eml_cap; 2130 u16 eml_med_sync_delay; 2131 u16 mld_capa_op; 2132 2133 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 2134 int arp_addr_cnt; 2135 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 2136 size_t ssid_len; 2137 bool s1g; 2138 bool idle; 2139 u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 2140 /* Protected by the wiphy mutex */ 2141 struct ieee80211_nan_sched_cfg nan_sched; 2142 }; 2143 2144 #define IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS 8 2145 2146 /** 2147 * struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm - negotiated TID to link map info 2148 * 2149 * @downlink: bitmap of active links per TID for downlink, or 0 if mapping for 2150 * this TID is not included. 2151 * @uplink: bitmap of active links per TID for uplink, or 0 if mapping for this 2152 * TID is not included. 2153 * @valid: info is valid or not. 2154 */ 2155 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm { 2156 u16 downlink[IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS]; 2157 u16 uplink[IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS]; 2158 bool valid; 2159 }; 2160 2161 /** 2162 * enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res - return value for negotiated TTLM handling 2163 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_ACCEPT: accept the request 2164 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_REJECT: reject the request 2165 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_SUGGEST_PREFERRED: reject and suggest a new mapping 2166 */ 2167 enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res { 2168 NEG_TTLM_RES_ACCEPT, 2169 NEG_TTLM_RES_REJECT, 2170 NEG_TTLM_RES_SUGGEST_PREFERRED 2171 }; 2172 2173 /** 2174 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 2175 * 2176 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 2177 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 2178 * 2179 * @type: type of this virtual interface 2180 * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg 2181 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 2182 * or the BSS we're associated to 2183 * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration, 2184 * indexed by link ID 2185 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO. 2186 * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO. 2187 * The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the 2188 * API calls meant for that purpose. 2189 * @dormant_links: subset of the valid links that are disabled/suspended 2190 * due to advertised or negotiated TTLM respectively. 2191 * 0 for non-MLO. 2192 * @suspended_links: subset of dormant_links representing links that are 2193 * suspended due to negotiated TTLM, and could be activated in the 2194 * future by tearing down the TTLM negotiation. 2195 * 0 for non-MLO. 2196 * @neg_ttlm: negotiated TID to link mapping info. 2197 * see &struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm. 2198 * @addr: address of this interface 2199 * @addr_valid: indicates if the address is actively used. Set to false for 2200 * passive monitor interfaces, true in all other cases. 2201 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 2202 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 2203 * @netdev_features: tx netdev features supported by the hardware for this 2204 * vif. mac80211 initializes this to hw->netdev_features, and the driver 2205 * can mask out specific tx features. mac80211 will handle software fixup 2206 * for masked offloads (GSO, CSUM) 2207 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 2208 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 2209 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 2210 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 2211 * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface. 2212 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface, 2213 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver 2214 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change 2215 * restrictions. 2216 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 2217 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 2218 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 2219 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 2220 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 2221 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 2222 * interface. 2223 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211 2224 * for this interface. 2225 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2226 * sizeof(void \*). 2227 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue 2228 * @txq_mgmt: the mgmt frame TX queue, currently only exists for NAN devices 2229 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see 2230 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags. 2231 */ 2232 struct ieee80211_vif { 2233 enum nl80211_iftype type; 2234 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg; 2235 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 2236 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2237 u16 valid_links, active_links, dormant_links, suspended_links; 2238 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm neg_ttlm; 2239 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 2240 bool addr_valid; 2241 bool p2p; 2242 2243 u8 cab_queue; 2244 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 2245 2246 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 2247 struct ieee80211_txq *txq_mgmt; 2248 2249 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2250 u32 driver_flags; 2251 u32 offload_flags; 2252 2253 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 2254 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 2255 #endif 2256 2257 bool probe_req_reg; 2258 bool rx_mcast_action_reg; 2259 2260 /* must be last */ 2261 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2262 }; 2263 2264 /** 2265 * ieee80211_vif_usable_links - Return the usable links for the vif 2266 * @vif: the vif for which the usable links are requested 2267 * Return: the usable link bitmap 2268 */ 2269 static inline u16 ieee80211_vif_usable_links(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2270 { 2271 return vif->valid_links & ~vif->dormant_links; 2272 } 2273 2274 /** 2275 * ieee80211_vif_is_mld - Returns true iff the vif is an MLD one 2276 * @vif: the vif 2277 * Return: %true if the vif is an MLD, %false otherwise. 2278 */ 2279 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mld(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2280 { 2281 /* valid_links != 0 indicates this vif is an MLD */ 2282 return vif->valid_links != 0; 2283 } 2284 2285 /** 2286 * ieee80211_vif_link_active - check if a given link is active 2287 * @vif: the vif 2288 * @link_id: the link ID to check 2289 * Return: %true if the vif is an MLD and the link is active, or if 2290 * the vif is not an MLD and the link ID is 0; %false otherwise. 2291 */ 2292 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_link_active(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 2293 unsigned int link_id) 2294 { 2295 if (!ieee80211_vif_is_mld(vif)) 2296 return link_id == 0; 2297 return vif->active_links & BIT(link_id); 2298 } 2299 2300 #define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id) \ 2301 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++) \ 2302 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2303 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2304 (link = link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id))) 2305 2306 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2307 { 2308 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 2309 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 2310 #endif 2311 return false; 2312 } 2313 2314 /** 2315 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 2316 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 2317 * 2318 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 2319 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 2320 * 2321 * Return: pointer to the wdev, or %NULL if the given wdev isn't 2322 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 2323 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 2324 */ 2325 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 2326 2327 /** 2328 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 2329 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 2330 * 2331 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 2332 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 2333 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif. 2334 * 2335 * Return: pointer to the wdev 2336 */ 2337 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 2338 2339 static inline bool lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2340 { 2341 return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->wiphy->mtx); 2342 } 2343 2344 #define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id) \ 2345 rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 2346 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif)) 2347 2348 #define link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id) \ 2349 rcu_dereference_check((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 2350 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif)) 2351 2352 /** 2353 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 2354 * 2355 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 2356 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 2357 * 2358 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 2359 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 2360 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 2361 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 2362 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 2363 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 2364 * generation in software. 2365 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 2366 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 2367 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 2368 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 2369 * (MFP) to be done in software. 2370 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 2371 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 2372 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 2373 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 2374 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 2375 * MIC. 2376 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 2377 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 2378 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 2379 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 2380 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 2381 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 2382 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 2383 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 2384 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 2385 * only for management frames (MFP). 2386 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 2387 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 2388 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 2389 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 2390 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 2391 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 2392 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 2393 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 2394 * for a AES_CMAC or a AES_GMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence 2395 * number generation only 2396 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SPP_AMSDU: SPP A-MSDUs can be used with this key 2397 * (set by mac80211 from the sta->spp_amsdu flag) 2398 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_CIP: This key is used for the Control Integrity 2399 * Protocol, and is either a pairwise key or a CIGTK. 2400 */ 2401 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 2402 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 2403 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 2404 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 2405 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 2406 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 2407 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 2408 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 2409 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 2410 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 2411 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 2412 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 2413 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SPP_AMSDU = BIT(11), 2414 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_CIP = BIT(12), 2415 }; 2416 2417 /** 2418 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 2419 * 2420 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 2421 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 2422 * 2423 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 2424 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 2425 * encrypted in hardware. 2426 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 2427 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 2428 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 2429 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 2430 * @keyidx: the key index (0-7) 2431 * @keylen: key material length 2432 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 2433 * data block: 2434 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 2435 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 2436 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 2437 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 2438 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 2439 * @link_id: the link ID, 0 for non-MLO, or -1 for pairwise keys 2440 */ 2441 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 2442 atomic64_t tx_pn; 2443 u32 cipher; 2444 u8 icv_len; 2445 u8 iv_len; 2446 u8 hw_key_idx; 2447 s8 keyidx; 2448 u16 flags; 2449 s8 link_id; 2450 u8 keylen; 2451 u8 key[]; 2452 }; 2453 2454 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 2455 2456 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 2457 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 2458 2459 /** 2460 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 2461 * 2462 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 2463 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2464 * reverse order than in packet) 2465 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2466 * reverse order than in packet) 2467 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2468 * reverse order than in packet) 2469 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2470 * reverse order than in packet) 2471 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 2472 */ 2473 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 2474 union { 2475 struct { 2476 u32 iv32; 2477 u16 iv16; 2478 } tkip; 2479 struct { 2480 u8 pn[6]; 2481 } ccmp; 2482 struct { 2483 u8 pn[6]; 2484 } aes_cmac; 2485 struct { 2486 u8 pn[6]; 2487 } aes_gmac; 2488 struct { 2489 u8 pn[6]; 2490 } gcmp; 2491 struct { 2492 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 2493 u8 seq_len; 2494 } hw; 2495 }; 2496 }; 2497 2498 /** 2499 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 2500 * 2501 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2502 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 2503 * 2504 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 2505 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 2506 */ 2507 enum set_key_cmd { 2508 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 2509 }; 2510 2511 /** 2512 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 2513 * 2514 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 2515 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 2516 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 2517 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 2518 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 2519 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 2520 */ 2521 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 2522 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 2523 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 2524 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 2525 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 2526 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 2527 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 2528 }; 2529 2530 /** 2531 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 2532 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 2533 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 2534 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 2535 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 2536 * (including 80+80 MHz) 2537 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz 2538 * 2539 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 2540 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 2541 */ 2542 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 2543 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 2544 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 2545 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 2546 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 2547 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320, 2548 }; 2549 2550 #define IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_MAX IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320 2551 2552 /** 2553 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 2554 * 2555 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 2556 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 2557 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 2558 */ 2559 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 2560 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 2561 struct { 2562 s8 idx; 2563 u8 count; 2564 u8 count_cts; 2565 u8 count_rts; 2566 u16 flags; 2567 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 2568 }; 2569 2570 /** 2571 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 2572 * 2573 * Used to configure txpower for station. 2574 * 2575 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 2576 * to the STA. 2577 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 2578 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 2579 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 2580 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 2581 * per peer TPC. 2582 */ 2583 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 2584 s16 power; 2585 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 2586 }; 2587 2588 /** 2589 * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links 2590 * 2591 * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the 2592 * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change. 2593 * 2594 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2595 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2596 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2597 * 2598 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2599 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2600 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2601 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2602 * 2603 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2604 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2605 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2606 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 2607 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 2608 */ 2609 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates { 2610 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2611 2612 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2613 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2614 }; 2615 2616 /** 2617 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info 2618 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single) 2619 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here. 2620 * 2621 * @sta: reference to owning STA 2622 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr 2623 * in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different 2624 * from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr) 2625 * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink) 2626 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 2627 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates 2628 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2629 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2630 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 2631 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities 2632 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA 2633 * @uhr_cap: UHR capabilities of this STA 2634 * @s1g_cap: S1G capabilities of this STA 2635 * @cip_cap: the CIP capabilities of this STA (or zero) 2636 * @agg: per-link data for multi-link aggregation 2637 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with. 2638 * This is the minimum between the peer's capabilities and our own 2639 * operating channel width; Invalid for NAN since that is operating on 2640 * multiple channels. 2641 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 2642 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 2643 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 2644 * the station moves to associated state. Invalid for NAN since it 2645 * operates on multiple configurations of rx_nss. 2646 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration 2647 * 2648 */ 2649 struct ieee80211_link_sta { 2650 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2651 2652 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2653 u8 link_id; 2654 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2655 2656 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 2657 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 2658 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 2659 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2660 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa; 2661 struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap; 2662 struct ieee80211_sta_uhr_cap uhr_cap; 2663 struct ieee80211_sta_s1g_cap s1g_cap; 2664 u8 cip_cap; 2665 2666 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg; 2667 2668 u8 rx_nss; 2669 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2670 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2671 }; 2672 2673 /** 2674 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 2675 * 2676 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 2677 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 2678 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 2679 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 2680 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 2681 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 2682 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association 2683 * and holds pointers to various link STA's 2684 * 2685 * @addr: MAC address 2686 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 2687 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 2688 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 2689 * Can be modified by driver. 2690 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 2691 * otherwise always false) 2692 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2693 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 2694 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 2695 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 2696 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 2697 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 2698 * @rates: rate control selection table 2699 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 2700 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 2701 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 2702 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 2703 * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station. 2704 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 2705 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 2706 * unlimited. 2707 * @eml_cap: EML capabilities of this MLO station 2708 * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links 2709 * For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA 2710 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it. 2711 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 2712 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues; note that the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) 2713 * is used for non-data frames 2714 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link 2715 * specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through 2716 * link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA 2717 * the first added link STA will point to deflink. 2718 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link, 2719 * i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and 2720 * would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO 2721 * STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to 2722 * @deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address 2723 * would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned 2724 * by the AP. 2725 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO 2726 * @spp_amsdu: indicates whether the STA uses SPP A-MSDU or not. 2727 * @epp_peer: indicates that the peer is an EPP peer. 2728 * @cip: indicates whether the STA uses control frame protection or not. 2729 * @twt_protected: does this STA support protected TWT frames 2730 * @nmi: For NDI stations, pointer to the NMI station of the peer. 2731 * @nan_sched: NAN peer schedule for this station. Valid only for NMI stations. 2732 * @ext_mld_capa_ops: the MLD's extended MLD capabilities and operations 2733 * NOTE: currently only tracked for AP STAs 2734 */ 2735 struct ieee80211_sta { 2736 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 2737 u16 aid; 2738 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2739 bool wme; 2740 u8 uapsd_queues; 2741 u8 max_sp; 2742 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2743 bool tdls; 2744 bool tdls_initiator; 2745 bool mfp; 2746 bool mlo; 2747 bool spp_amsdu; 2748 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2749 u16 eml_cap; 2750 2751 bool cip; 2752 bool twt_protected; 2753 2754 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur; 2755 2756 bool support_p2p_ps; 2757 2758 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2759 2760 u16 valid_links; 2761 u16 ext_mld_capa_ops; 2762 bool epp_peer; 2763 struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink; 2764 struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2765 2766 struct ieee80211_sta __rcu *nmi; 2767 2768 /* should only be accessed with the wiphy mutex held */ 2769 struct ieee80211_nan_peer_sched *nan_sched; 2770 2771 /* must be last */ 2772 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2773 }; 2774 2775 #ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP 2776 bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 2777 #else 2778 static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta) 2779 { 2780 return true; 2781 } 2782 #endif 2783 2784 #define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id) \ 2785 rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2786 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2787 2788 #define link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id) \ 2789 rcu_dereference_check((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2790 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2791 2792 #define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id) \ 2793 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++) \ 2794 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2795 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2796 ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id))) 2797 2798 /** 2799 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2800 * 2801 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2802 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2803 * 2804 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2805 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2806 */ 2807 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2808 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2809 }; 2810 2811 /** 2812 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2813 * 2814 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2815 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2816 */ 2817 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2818 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2819 }; 2820 2821 /** 2822 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2823 * 2824 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2825 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2826 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2827 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2828 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2829 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2830 * 2831 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2832 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2833 */ 2834 struct ieee80211_txq { 2835 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2836 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2837 u8 tid; 2838 u8 ac; 2839 2840 /* must be last */ 2841 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2842 }; 2843 2844 /** 2845 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2846 * 2847 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2848 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2849 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2850 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2851 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2852 * 2853 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2854 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2855 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2856 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2857 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2858 * algorithm. 2859 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2860 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2861 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2862 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2863 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2864 * CCK frames. 2865 * 2866 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2867 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2868 * the FCS at the end. 2869 * 2870 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2871 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2872 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2873 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2874 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2875 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2876 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2877 * 2878 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2879 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2880 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2881 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2882 * 2883 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2884 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2885 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2886 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2887 * 2888 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2889 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2890 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2891 * 2892 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2893 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2894 * 2895 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2896 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2897 * 2898 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2899 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2900 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2901 * 2902 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2903 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2904 * 2905 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2906 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2907 * 2908 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2909 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2910 * the stack. 2911 * 2912 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2913 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2914 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2915 * 2916 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2917 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2918 * dtim_period). 2919 * 2920 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2921 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2922 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2923 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2924 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2925 * only in that case. 2926 * 2927 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2928 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2929 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2930 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2931 * Use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to manually toggle the PS mode 2932 * of connected stations. 2933 * 2934 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2935 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2936 * software. 2937 * 2938 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2939 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2940 * active interfaces. 2941 * 2942 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_VIRTUAL_MONITOR: The driver would like to be informed 2943 * of any monitor interface, as well as their configured channel. 2944 * This is useful for supporting multiple monitor interfaces on different 2945 * channels. 2946 * 2947 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2948 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2949 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2950 * 2951 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2952 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2953 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2954 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2955 * supported cipher suites. 2956 * 2957 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2958 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2959 * for frames. 2960 * 2961 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2962 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2963 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2964 * control for more details. 2965 * 2966 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2967 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2968 * 2969 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2970 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2971 * is supported. 2972 * 2973 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2974 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2975 * 2976 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2977 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2978 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2979 * 2980 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2981 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2982 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2983 * CSA frame. 2984 * 2985 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2986 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2987 * 2988 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2989 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2990 * 2991 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2992 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2993 * 2994 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2995 * within A-MPDU. 2996 * 2997 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2998 * for sent beacons. 2999 * 3000 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 3001 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 3002 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 3003 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 3004 * Note that this doesn't apply for NAN, in which the peer's NMI address 3005 * can be equal to its NDI address. 3006 * 3007 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 3008 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 3009 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 3010 * timeout. 3011 * 3012 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 3013 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 3014 * 3015 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 3016 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 3017 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 3018 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 3019 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 3020 * 3021 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 3022 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 3023 * 3024 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 3025 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 3026 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 3027 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 3028 * 3029 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 3030 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 3031 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 3032 * 3033 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 3034 * TDLS links. 3035 * 3036 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 3037 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 3038 * 3039 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 3040 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 3041 * 3042 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 3043 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 3044 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 3045 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 3046 * See also the documentation for that flag. 3047 * 3048 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 3049 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 3050 * TXQs to start with. 3051 * 3052 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 3053 * length in tx status information 3054 * 3055 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 3056 * 3057 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 3058 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 3059 * 3060 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 3061 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 3062 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 3063 * 3064 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation 3065 * offload 3066 * 3067 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation 3068 * offload 3069 * 3070 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx 3071 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface. 3072 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real 3073 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to 3074 * the stack. 3075 * 3076 * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color 3077 * collision detection and doesn't need it in software. 3078 * 3079 * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting 3080 * multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that. 3081 * 3082 * @IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING: HW requires disabling puncturing in EHT 3083 * and connecting with a lower bandwidth instead 3084 * 3085 * @IEEE80211_HW_HANDLES_QUIET_CSA: HW/driver handles quieting for CSA, so 3086 * no need to stop queues. This really should be set by a driver that 3087 * implements MLO, so operation can continue on other links when one 3088 * link is switching. 3089 * 3090 * @IEEE80211_HW_STRICT: strictly enforce certain things mandated by the spec 3091 * but otherwise ignored/worked around for interoperability. This is a 3092 * HW flag so drivers can opt in according to their own control, e.g. in 3093 * testing. 3094 * 3095 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_NDP_BLOCKACK: HW can transmit/receive S1G NDP 3096 * BlockAck frames. 3097 * 3098 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 3099 */ 3100 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 3101 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 3102 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 3103 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 3104 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 3105 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 3106 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 3107 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 3108 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 3109 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 3110 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 3111 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 3112 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 3113 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 3114 IEEE80211_HW_NO_VIRTUAL_MONITOR, 3115 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 3116 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 3117 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 3118 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 3119 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 3120 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 3121 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 3122 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 3123 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 3124 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 3125 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 3126 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 3127 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 3128 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 3129 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 3130 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 3131 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 3132 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 3133 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 3134 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 3135 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 3136 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 3137 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 3138 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 3139 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 3140 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 3141 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 3142 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 3143 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 3144 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 3145 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 3146 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 3147 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 3148 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 3149 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 3150 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD, 3151 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD, 3152 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP, 3153 IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION, 3154 IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX, 3155 IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING, 3156 IEEE80211_HW_HANDLES_QUIET_CSA, 3157 IEEE80211_HW_STRICT, 3158 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_NDP_BLOCKACK, 3159 3160 /* keep last, obviously */ 3161 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 3162 }; 3163 3164 /** 3165 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 3166 * 3167 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 3168 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 3169 * 3170 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 3171 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 3172 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 3173 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 3174 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 3175 * 3176 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 3177 * 3178 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 3179 * along with this structure. 3180 * 3181 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 3182 * 3183 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 3184 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 3185 * 3186 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 3187 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 3188 * 3189 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 3190 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 3191 * 3192 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 3193 * that HW supports 3194 * 3195 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 3196 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 3197 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 3198 * 3199 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 3200 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 3201 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 3202 * 3203 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 3204 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 3205 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 3206 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 3207 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 3208 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 3209 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 3210 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 3211 * 3212 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 3213 * can handle. 3214 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 3215 * the hw can report back. 3216 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 3217 * 3218 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 3219 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 3220 * aggregation. 3221 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 3222 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 3223 * it shouldn't be set. 3224 * 3225 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 3226 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 3227 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 3228 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 3229 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 3230 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 3231 * 3232 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 3233 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 3234 * 3235 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 3236 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 3237 * 3238 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 3239 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 3240 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 3241 * adding _BW is supported today. 3242 * 3243 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 3244 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 3245 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 3246 * 3247 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 3248 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 3249 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 3250 * device_timestamp. 3251 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 3252 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 3253 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 3254 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 3255 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 3256 * 3257 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 3258 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 3259 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 3260 * 3261 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 3262 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 3263 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 3264 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 3265 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 3266 * neither enabled. 3267 * 3268 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 3269 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 3270 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 3271 * 3272 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 3273 * device. 3274 * 3275 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 3276 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 3277 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 3278 * 3279 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 3280 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 3281 * 3282 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 3283 * 3284 * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware. 3285 * The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions. 3286 * The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level. 3287 * 3288 * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list. 3289 */ 3290 struct ieee80211_hw { 3291 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 3292 struct wiphy *wiphy; 3293 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 3294 void *priv; 3295 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 3296 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 3297 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 3298 int vif_data_size; 3299 int sta_data_size; 3300 int chanctx_data_size; 3301 int txq_data_size; 3302 u16 queues; 3303 u16 max_listen_interval; 3304 s8 max_signal; 3305 u8 max_rates; 3306 u8 max_report_rates; 3307 u8 max_rate_tries; 3308 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 3309 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 3310 u8 max_tx_fragments; 3311 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 3312 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 3313 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 3314 struct { 3315 int units_pos; 3316 s16 accuracy; 3317 } radiotap_timestamp; 3318 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 3319 u8 uapsd_queues; 3320 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 3321 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 3322 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 3323 u8 weight_multiplier; 3324 u32 max_mtu; 3325 const s8 *tx_power_levels; 3326 u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx; 3327 }; 3328 3329 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3330 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 3331 { 3332 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 3333 } 3334 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 3335 3336 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3337 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 3338 { 3339 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 3340 } 3341 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 3342 3343 /** 3344 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 3345 * 3346 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 3347 * @req: cfg80211 request. 3348 */ 3349 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 3350 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 3351 3352 /* Keep last */ 3353 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 3354 }; 3355 3356 /** 3357 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 3358 * 3359 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 3360 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 3361 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 3362 * @status: channel-switch response status 3363 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 3364 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 3365 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 3366 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 3367 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 3368 */ 3369 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 3370 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3371 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 3372 u8 action_code; 3373 u32 status; 3374 u32 timestamp; 3375 u16 switch_time; 3376 u16 switch_timeout; 3377 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 3378 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 3379 }; 3380 3381 /** 3382 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 3383 * 3384 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 3385 * 3386 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 3387 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 3388 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 3389 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 3390 * is already used internally by mac80211. 3391 * 3392 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 3393 */ 3394 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 3395 3396 /** 3397 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 3398 * 3399 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 3400 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 3401 */ 3402 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 3403 { 3404 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 3405 } 3406 3407 /** 3408 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 3409 * 3410 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 3411 * @addr: the address to set 3412 */ 3413 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 3414 { 3415 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 3416 } 3417 3418 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3419 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3420 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 3421 { 3422 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 3423 return NULL; 3424 3425 if (c->band >= NUM_NL80211_BANDS) 3426 return NULL; 3427 3428 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 3429 } 3430 3431 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3432 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3433 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 3434 { 3435 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 3436 return NULL; 3437 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 3438 } 3439 3440 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3441 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3442 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 3443 { 3444 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 3445 return NULL; 3446 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 3447 } 3448 3449 /** 3450 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 3451 * @hw: the hardware 3452 * @skb: the skb 3453 * 3454 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 3455 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 3456 */ 3457 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 3458 3459 /** 3460 * ieee80211_purge_tx_queue - purge TX skb queue 3461 * @hw: the hardware 3462 * @skbs: the skbs 3463 * 3464 * Free a set of transmit skbs. Use this function when device is going to stop 3465 * but some transmit skbs without TX status are still queued. 3466 * This function does not take the list lock and the caller must hold the 3467 * relevant locks to use it. 3468 */ 3469 void ieee80211_purge_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3470 struct sk_buff_head *skbs); 3471 3472 /** 3473 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 3474 * 3475 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 3476 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 3477 * 3478 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 3479 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 3480 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 3481 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 3482 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 3483 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 3484 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 3485 * 3486 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 3487 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 3488 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 3489 * 3490 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 3491 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 3492 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 3493 * hardware key index. You are free to use the full u8 range. 3494 * 3495 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 3496 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 3497 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 3498 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 3499 * 3500 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 3501 * 3502 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 3503 * for it has been uploaded to hardware. The stack will not make any 3504 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 3505 * based on the receive flags. 3506 * 3507 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 3508 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 3509 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 3510 * keys. 3511 * 3512 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 3513 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 3514 * handler. 3515 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 3516 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 3517 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 3518 * rekeying); it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 3519 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 3520 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 3521 * 3522 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 3523 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 3524 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 3525 * 3526 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 3527 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following 3528 * requirements: 3529 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211 3530 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed, 3531 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 3532 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 3533 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 3534 encrypted with the new key when also needing 3535 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and 3536 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 3537 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 3538 */ 3539 3540 /** 3541 * DOC: Powersave support 3542 * 3543 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 3544 * 3545 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself; 3546 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 3547 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 3548 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 3549 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 3550 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 3551 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 3552 * it finds traffic directed to it. 3553 * 3554 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 3555 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 3556 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 3557 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 3558 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 3559 * 3560 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 3561 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 3562 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 3563 * 3564 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 3565 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 3566 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 3567 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 3568 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 3569 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 3570 * as best as it can; mac80211 is too slow to do that. 3571 * 3572 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 3573 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 3574 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 3575 * the next wakeup. It's a compromise of getting good enough latency when 3576 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 3577 * periods. 3578 * 3579 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 3580 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 3581 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 3582 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 3583 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 3584 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 3585 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 3586 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 3587 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 3588 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 3589 * 3590 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 3591 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 3592 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 3593 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 3594 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 3595 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 3596 * 3597 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 3598 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 3599 */ 3600 3601 /** 3602 * DOC: Beacon filter support 3603 * 3604 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 3605 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 3606 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 3607 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 3608 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 3609 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 3610 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 3611 * 3612 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 3613 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 3614 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 3615 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 3616 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 3617 * 3618 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 3619 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 3620 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 3621 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 3622 * 3623 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 3624 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 3625 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 3626 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 3627 * 3628 * - a list of information element IDs 3629 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 3630 * 3631 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 3632 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 3633 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 3634 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 3635 * vendor information elements. 3636 * 3637 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 3638 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 3639 * 3640 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead. Just make sure nothing 3641 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 3642 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 3643 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 3644 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 3645 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 3646 * 3647 * 3648 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 3649 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 3650 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 3651 * the received data packets). This can consist of notifying the host when 3652 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 3653 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 3654 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 3655 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 3656 * 3657 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 3658 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 3659 * signal strength threshold checking. 3660 */ 3661 3662 /** 3663 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 3664 * 3665 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 3666 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 3667 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 3668 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 3669 * 3670 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 3671 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 3672 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 3673 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 3674 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 3675 * hardware flags. 3676 * 3677 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 3678 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 3679 * turned off otherwise. 3680 * 3681 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 3682 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 3683 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 3684 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 3685 */ 3686 3687 /** 3688 * DOC: Frame filtering 3689 * 3690 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 3691 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 3692 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 3693 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 3694 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 3695 * 3696 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 3697 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 3698 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 3699 * 3700 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 3701 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 3702 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 3703 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 3704 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 3705 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 3706 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 3707 * 3708 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 3709 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 3710 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 3711 * or dropped. 3712 * 3713 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 3714 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 3715 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 3716 * the flag, but not clear it. 3717 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 3718 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 3719 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 3720 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 3721 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 3722 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 3723 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 3724 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 3725 */ 3726 3727 /** 3728 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 3729 * 3730 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 3731 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 3732 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 3733 * 3734 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 3735 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 3736 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 3737 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 3738 * the driver code. 3739 * 3740 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 3741 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 3742 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 3743 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 3744 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 3745 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 3746 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 3747 * 3748 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 3749 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 3750 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 3751 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 3752 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 3753 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 3754 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 3755 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 3756 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 3757 * @sta_notify callback. 3758 * 3759 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 3760 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 3761 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 3762 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 3763 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 3764 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 3765 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 3766 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 3767 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 3768 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 3769 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 3770 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 3771 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 3772 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 3773 * 3774 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 3775 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 3776 * 3777 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 3778 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 3779 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 3780 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 3781 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 3782 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 3783 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 3784 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 3785 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 3786 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 3787 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 3788 * 3789 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 3790 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 3791 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 3792 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 3793 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 3794 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 3795 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 3796 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 3797 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 3798 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames. 3799 * To help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 3800 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 3801 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 3802 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 3803 * 3804 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 3805 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 3806 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 3807 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 3808 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 3809 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 3810 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 3811 * 3812 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 3813 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 3814 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 3815 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 3816 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 3817 * 3818 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3819 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3820 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3821 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3822 */ 3823 3824 /** 3825 * DOC: HW queue control 3826 * 3827 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3828 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3829 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3830 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3831 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3832 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3833 * 3834 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3835 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3836 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3837 * 3838 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3839 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3840 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3841 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3842 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3843 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3844 * the hardware queue. 3845 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3846 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3847 * 3848 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed; multiple virtual 3849 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3850 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3851 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3852 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3853 * 3854 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3855 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3856 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3857 * off-channel queue: 9 3858 * 3859 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3860 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3861 * 3862 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3863 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3864 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3865 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3866 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3867 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3868 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3869 * 3870 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3871 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3872 * 3873 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3874 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3875 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3876 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3877 */ 3878 3879 /** 3880 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3881 * 3882 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3883 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3884 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3885 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3886 * 3887 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3888 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3889 * multicast address. 3890 * 3891 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3892 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3893 * 3894 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3895 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3896 * 3897 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3898 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3899 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3900 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3901 * honour this flag if possible. 3902 * 3903 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3904 * station 3905 * 3906 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3907 * 3908 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3909 * 3910 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3911 * 3912 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames 3913 */ 3914 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3915 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3916 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3917 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3918 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3919 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3920 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3921 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3922 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3923 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9, 3924 }; 3925 3926 /** 3927 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3928 * 3929 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3930 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3931 * 3932 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3933 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3934 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3935 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3936 * 3937 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3938 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3939 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3940 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or 3941 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status 3942 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after 3943 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special 3944 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3945 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3946 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3947 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3948 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3949 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3950 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3951 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3952 * session is gone and removes the station. 3953 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3954 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3955 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3956 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3957 */ 3958 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3959 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3960 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3961 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3962 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3963 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3964 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3965 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3966 }; 3967 3968 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3969 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2 3970 3971 /** 3972 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3973 * 3974 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3975 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3976 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3977 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3978 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3979 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3980 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3981 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3982 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3983 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3984 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3985 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3986 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3987 */ 3988 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3989 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3990 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3991 u16 tid; 3992 u16 ssn; 3993 u16 buf_size; 3994 bool amsdu; 3995 u16 timeout; 3996 }; 3997 3998 /** 3999 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 4000 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 4001 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 4002 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 4003 */ 4004 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 4005 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 4006 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 4007 }; 4008 4009 /** 4010 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 4011 * 4012 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 4013 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 4014 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 4015 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 4016 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 4017 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 4018 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 4019 * the peer. 4020 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 4021 * by the peer 4022 */ 4023 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 4024 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 4025 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 4026 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 4027 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 4028 }; 4029 4030 /** 4031 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 4032 * 4033 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 4034 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 4035 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 4036 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 4037 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 4038 * 4039 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 4040 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 4041 * for sending management frames offchannel. 4042 */ 4043 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 4044 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 4045 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 4046 }; 4047 4048 /** 4049 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type 4050 * 4051 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 4052 * reconfiguration type was completed. 4053 * 4054 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 4055 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 4056 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 4057 * of wowlan configuration) 4058 */ 4059 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 4060 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 4061 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 4062 }; 4063 4064 /** 4065 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information 4066 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration, 4067 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method. 4068 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc) 4069 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only 4070 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only 4071 * valid for auth and (re)assoc. 4072 * @was_assoc: set if this call is due to deauth/disassoc 4073 * while just having been associated 4074 * @link_id: the link id on which the frame will be TX'ed. 4075 * 0 for a non-MLO connection. 4076 */ 4077 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info { 4078 u16 duration; 4079 u16 subtype; 4080 u8 success:1, was_assoc:1; 4081 int link_id; 4082 }; 4083 4084 /** 4085 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 4086 * 4087 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 4088 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 4089 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 4090 * 4091 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 4092 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 4093 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 4094 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 4095 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 4096 * Must be atomic. 4097 * 4098 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 4099 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 4100 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 4101 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 4102 * or zero. 4103 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 4104 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 4105 * is added. 4106 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 4107 * 4108 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 4109 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 4110 * it must turn off frame reception.) 4111 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 4112 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 4113 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 4114 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 4115 * 4116 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 4117 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 4118 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 4119 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 4120 * reconfigured at resume time. 4121 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 4122 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 4123 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 4124 * must return 1 from this function. 4125 * 4126 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 4127 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 4128 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 4129 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 4130 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 4131 * 4132 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 4133 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 4134 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 4135 * in suspend(). 4136 * 4137 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 4138 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 4139 * and @stop must be implemented. 4140 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 4141 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 4142 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 4143 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 4144 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 4145 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 4146 * 4147 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 4148 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 4149 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 4150 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 4151 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 4152 * 4153 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 4154 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 4155 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 4156 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 4157 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 4158 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 4159 * MAC address of the device going away. 4160 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 4161 * 4162 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 4163 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 4164 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 4165 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 4166 * 4167 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 4168 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 4169 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 4170 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 4171 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 4172 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 4173 * can sleep. 4174 * Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed 4175 * are not implemented. 4176 * 4177 * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface 4178 * (MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the 4179 * lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.) 4180 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed. 4181 * The callback can sleep. 4182 * 4183 * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link 4184 * parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an 4185 * individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information. 4186 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id 4187 * parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for 4188 * non-MLO connections. 4189 * The callback can sleep. 4190 * 4191 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 4192 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 4193 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 4194 * 4195 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 4196 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 4197 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 4198 * 4199 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 4200 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 4201 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 4202 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 4203 * which flags are changed. 4204 * This callback can sleep. 4205 * 4206 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 4207 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 4208 * 4209 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 4210 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 4211 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 4212 * is enabled. 4213 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 4214 * The callback can sleep. 4215 * 4216 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 4217 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 4218 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 4219 * The callback must be atomic. 4220 * 4221 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 4222 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 4223 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 4224 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 4225 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 4226 * 4227 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 4228 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 4229 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 4230 * 4231 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 4232 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 4233 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 4234 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 4235 * that power save is disabled. 4236 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 4237 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 4238 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 4239 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 4240 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 4241 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 4242 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 4243 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 4244 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 4245 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 4246 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 4247 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 4248 * The callback can sleep. 4249 * 4250 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 4251 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 4252 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 4253 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 4254 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 4255 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 4256 * The callback can sleep. 4257 * 4258 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 4259 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 4260 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 4261 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 4262 * 4263 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 4264 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 4265 * 4266 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 4267 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 4268 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 4269 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 4270 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 4271 * 4272 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 4273 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 4274 * this notification. 4275 * The callback can sleep. 4276 * 4277 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 4278 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 4279 * The callback can sleep. 4280 * 4281 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 4282 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 4283 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 4284 * The callback must be atomic. 4285 * 4286 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 4287 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 4288 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 4289 * should be set as well. 4290 * The callback can sleep. 4291 * 4292 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 4293 * The callback can sleep. 4294 * 4295 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 4296 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 4297 * 4298 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 4299 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 4300 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 4301 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 4302 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 4303 * This callback can sleep. 4304 * 4305 * @vif_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add a debugfs vif 4306 * directory with its files. This callback should be within a 4307 * CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep. 4308 * 4309 * @link_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4310 * when a link is added to a mac80211 vif. This callback should be within 4311 * a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep. 4312 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the default bss_conf 4313 * with the vif's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 4314 * 4315 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4316 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 4317 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 4318 * callback can sleep. 4319 * 4320 * @link_sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4321 * when a link is added to a mac80211 station. This callback 4322 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 4323 * callback can sleep. 4324 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the deflink with the 4325 * station's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 4326 * 4327 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 4328 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 4329 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 4330 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 4331 * 4332 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx 4333 * power for the station. 4334 * This callback can sleep. 4335 * 4336 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 4337 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 4338 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 4339 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 4340 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 4341 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 4342 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 4343 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 4344 * The callback can sleep. 4345 * 4346 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 4347 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 4348 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 4349 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 4350 * in @sta_state. 4351 * The callback can sleep. 4352 * 4353 * @link_sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can 4354 * be used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 4355 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 4356 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 4357 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 4358 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 4359 * Must be atomic. 4360 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 4361 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 4362 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 4363 * 4364 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 4365 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 4366 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 4367 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 4368 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 4369 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 4370 * The callback can sleep. 4371 * 4372 * @link_sta_statistics: Get link statistics for this station. For example with 4373 * beacon filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be 4374 * accurate, so let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can 4375 * fill most of the values (indicating which by setting the filled 4376 * bitmap), but not all of them make sense - see the source for which 4377 * ones are possible. 4378 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 4379 * The callback can sleep. 4380 * 4381 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 4382 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 4383 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 4384 * The callback can sleep. 4385 * 4386 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 4387 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 4388 * required function. 4389 * The callback can sleep. 4390 * 4391 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 4392 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 4393 * required function. 4394 * The callback can sleep. 4395 * 4396 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 4397 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 4398 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 4399 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 4400 * The callback can sleep. 4401 * 4402 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 4403 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 4404 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 4405 * TSF synchronization. 4406 * The callback can sleep. 4407 * 4408 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 4409 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 4410 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 4411 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 4412 * The callback can sleep. 4413 * 4414 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 4415 * 4416 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 4417 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 4418 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 4419 * The callback can sleep. 4420 * 4421 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 4422 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 4423 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 4424 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 4425 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 4426 * 4427 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 4428 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 4429 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 4430 * 4431 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 4432 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 4433 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 4434 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 4435 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 4436 * Note that vif can be NULL. 4437 * The callback can sleep. 4438 * 4439 * @flush_sta: Flush or drop all pending frames from the hardware queue(s) for 4440 * the given station, as it's about to be removed. 4441 * The callback can sleep. 4442 * 4443 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 4444 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 4445 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 4446 * completion of the channel switch. 4447 * 4448 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 4449 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 4450 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 4451 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 4452 * 4453 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 4454 * 4455 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 4456 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 4457 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 4458 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 4459 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 4460 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 4461 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 4462 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 4463 * must be accepted in this case. 4464 * This callback may sleep. 4465 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 4466 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 4467 * 4468 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 4469 * 4470 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 4471 * 4472 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 4473 * queues before entering power save. 4474 * 4475 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 4476 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 4477 * The callback can sleep. 4478 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 4479 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 4480 * The callback must be atomic. 4481 * 4482 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 4483 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 4484 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 4485 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 4486 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 4487 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 4488 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 4489 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 4490 * more-data bit must always be set. 4491 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 4492 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 4493 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 4494 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 4495 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 4496 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 4497 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 4498 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 4499 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 4500 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 4501 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 4502 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 4503 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 4504 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 4505 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 4506 * This callback must be atomic. 4507 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 4508 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 4509 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 4510 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 4511 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 4512 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 4513 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 4514 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 4515 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 4516 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 4517 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 4518 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 4519 * This callback must be atomic. 4520 * 4521 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 4522 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's 4523 * expected to return a static value. 4524 * 4525 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 4526 * 4527 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 4528 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 4529 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's 4530 * expected to return a static value. 4531 * 4532 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 4533 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 4534 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 4535 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 4536 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 4537 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 4538 * management frame prior to transmitting that frame to allow the driver 4539 * to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response and be 4540 * able to synchronize with the GO. 4541 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 4542 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 4543 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info 4544 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the 4545 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested. 4546 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 4547 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously 4548 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data 4549 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used. 4550 * Note that this isn't always called for each mgd_prepare_tx() call, for 4551 * example for SAE the 'confirm' messages can be on the air in any order. 4552 * 4553 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 4554 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 4555 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 4556 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 4557 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 4558 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 4559 * 2 * (DTIM period). 4560 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 4561 * 4562 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 4563 * This callback may sleep. 4564 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 4565 * This callback may sleep. 4566 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 4567 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 4568 * channel context with different settings 4569 * This callback may sleep. 4570 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 4571 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 4572 * This callback may sleep. 4573 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 4574 * unbound from vif. 4575 * This callback may sleep. 4576 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 4577 * another, as specified in the list of 4578 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 4579 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 4580 * This callback may sleep. 4581 * 4582 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 4583 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 4584 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 4585 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 4586 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 4587 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 4588 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 4589 * 4590 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 4591 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 4592 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 4593 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 4594 * This callback may sleep. 4595 * 4596 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 4597 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 4598 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 4599 * 4600 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 4601 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 4602 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 4603 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 4604 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 4605 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 4606 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been 4607 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 4608 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 4609 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 4610 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4611 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 4612 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 4613 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 4614 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4615 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 4616 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4617 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4618 * when channel switch procedure was aborted, allowing the 4619 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4620 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 4621 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 4622 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 4623 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 4624 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 4625 * channel context is bound before this is called. 4626 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 4627 * 4628 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 4629 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 4630 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 4631 * 4632 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 4633 * and hardware limits. 4634 * 4635 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 4636 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 4637 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 4638 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 4639 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 4640 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 4641 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 4642 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 4643 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 4644 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 4645 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 4646 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 4647 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 4648 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 4649 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 4650 * the function call. 4651 * 4652 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 4653 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 4654 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 4655 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 4656 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 4657 * 4658 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 4659 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 4660 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 4661 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 4662 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 4663 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 4664 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 4665 * changed parameters. 4666 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 4667 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 4668 * this call. 4669 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 4670 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 4671 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 4672 * @nan_peer_sched_changed: Notifies the driver that the peer NAN schedule 4673 * has changed. The new schedule is available via sta->nan_sched. 4674 * Note that the channel_entry blob might not match the actual chandef 4675 * since the bandwidth of the chandef is the minimum of the local and peer 4676 * bandwidth. It is the driver responsibility to remove the peer schedule 4677 * when the NMI station is removed. 4678 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 4679 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 4680 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 4681 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 4682 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 4683 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 4684 * 4685 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 4686 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 4687 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 4688 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 4689 * This callback may sleep. 4690 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags 4691 * This callback may sleep. 4692 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using 4693 * 4-address mode 4694 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings. 4695 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed 4696 * to use rx decapsulation offload 4697 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer. 4698 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters 4699 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement. 4700 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of 4701 * twt structure. 4702 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received 4703 * from the peer. 4704 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for 4705 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit 4706 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev. 4707 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime 4708 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected 4709 * radar channel. 4710 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to 4711 * disable background CAC/radar detection. 4712 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to 4713 * resolve a path for hardware flow offloading 4714 * @can_activate_links: Checks if a specific active_links bitmap is 4715 * supported by the driver. 4716 * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while 4717 * removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer), 4718 * but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or 4719 * new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation. 4720 * The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures 4721 * that were already removed, in case they're needed. 4722 * Note that removal of link should always succeed, so the return value 4723 * will be ignored in a removal only case. 4724 * This callback can sleep. 4725 * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to 4726 * @change_vif_links. This callback can sleep. 4727 * Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links, 4728 * i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero. 4729 * In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them. 4730 * @set_hw_timestamp: Enable/disable HW timestamping of TM/FTM frames. This is 4731 * not restored at HW reset by mac80211 so drivers need to take care of 4732 * that. 4733 * @net_setup_tc: Called from .ndo_setup_tc in order to prepare hardware 4734 * flow offloading for flows originating from the vif. 4735 * Note that the driver must not assume that the vif driver_data is valid 4736 * at this point, since the callback can be called during netdev teardown. 4737 * @can_neg_ttlm: for managed interface, requests the driver to determine 4738 * if the requested TID-To-Link mapping can be accepted or not. 4739 * If it's not accepted the driver may suggest a preferred mapping and 4740 * modify @ttlm parameter with the suggested TID-to-Link mapping. 4741 * @prep_add_interface: prepare for interface addition. This can be used by 4742 * drivers to prepare for the addition of a new interface, e.g., allocate 4743 * the needed resources etc. This callback doesn't guarantee that an 4744 * interface with the specified type would be added, and thus drivers that 4745 * implement this callback need to handle such cases. The type is the full 4746 * &enum nl80211_iftype. 4747 * @set_eml_op_mode: Configure eMLSR/eMLMR operation mode in the underlay 4748 * driver according to the parameter received in the EML Operating mode 4749 * notification frame. 4750 */ 4751 struct ieee80211_ops { 4752 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4753 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 4754 struct sk_buff *skb); 4755 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4756 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool suspend); 4757 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 4758 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 4759 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4760 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 4761 #endif 4762 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4763 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4764 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4765 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4766 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 4767 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4768 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4769 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int radio_idx, u32 changed); 4770 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4771 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4772 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4773 u64 changed); 4774 void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4775 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4776 u64 changed); 4777 void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4778 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4779 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4780 u64 changed); 4781 4782 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4783 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4784 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4785 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4786 4787 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4788 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 4789 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4790 unsigned int changed_flags, 4791 unsigned int *total_flags, 4792 u64 multicast); 4793 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4794 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4795 unsigned int filter_flags, 4796 unsigned int changed_flags); 4797 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4798 bool set); 4799 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 4800 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4801 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 4802 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4803 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4804 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 4805 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4806 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 4807 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4808 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4809 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 4810 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4811 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 4812 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4813 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 4814 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4815 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4816 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4817 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4818 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 4819 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 4820 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4821 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4822 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4823 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4824 const u8 *mac_addr); 4825 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4826 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4827 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4828 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 4829 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4830 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 4831 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 4832 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int radio_idx, 4833 u32 value); 4834 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int radio_idx, 4835 u32 value); 4836 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4837 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4838 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4839 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4840 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 4841 void (*vif_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4842 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4843 void (*link_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4844 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4845 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4846 struct dentry *dir); 4847 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4848 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4849 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4850 struct dentry *dir); 4851 void (*link_sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4852 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4853 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4854 struct dentry *dir); 4855 #endif 4856 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4857 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4858 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4859 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4860 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4861 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4862 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4863 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 4864 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 4865 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4866 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4867 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4868 void (*link_sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4869 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4870 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4871 u32 changed); 4872 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4873 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4874 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4875 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4876 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4877 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4878 struct station_info *sinfo); 4879 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4880 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4881 unsigned int link_id, u16 ac, 4882 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 4883 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4884 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4885 u64 tsf); 4886 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4887 s64 offset); 4888 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4889 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4890 void (*link_sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4891 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4892 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4893 struct link_station_info *link_sinfo); 4894 4895 /** 4896 * @ampdu_action: 4897 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 4898 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 4899 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 4900 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 4901 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 4902 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 4903 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 4904 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 4905 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 4906 * 4907 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 4908 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 4909 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 4910 * 4911 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 4912 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 4913 * 4914 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 4915 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 4916 * - ``TX: 81`` 4917 * 4918 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 4919 * 4920 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 4921 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 4922 * if the session can start immediately. 4923 * 4924 * The callback can sleep. 4925 */ 4926 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4927 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4928 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 4929 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 4930 struct survey_info *survey); 4931 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4932 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int radio_idx, 4933 s16 coverage_class); 4934 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 4935 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4936 void *data, int len); 4937 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 4938 struct netlink_callback *cb, 4939 void *data, int len); 4940 #endif 4941 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4942 u32 queues, bool drop); 4943 void (*flush_sta)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4944 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4945 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4946 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4947 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4948 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int radio_idx, 4949 u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 4950 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int radio_idx, 4951 u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 4952 4953 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4954 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4955 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 4956 int duration, 4957 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 4958 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4959 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4960 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 4961 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4962 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 4963 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4964 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4965 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 4966 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4967 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4968 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 4969 4970 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4971 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4972 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4973 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4974 bool more_data); 4975 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4976 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4977 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4978 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4979 bool more_data); 4980 4981 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4982 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 4983 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4984 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4985 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 4986 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4987 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4988 u32 sset, u8 *data); 4989 4990 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4991 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4992 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4993 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4994 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4995 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4996 4997 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4998 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4999 unsigned int link_id); 5000 5001 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5002 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 5003 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5004 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 5005 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5006 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 5007 u32 changed); 5008 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5009 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5010 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 5011 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 5012 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5013 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5014 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 5015 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 5016 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5017 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 5018 int n_vifs, 5019 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 5020 5021 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5022 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 5023 5024 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 5025 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5026 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5027 struct inet6_dev *idev); 5028 #endif 5029 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5030 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5031 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 5032 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5033 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5034 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 5035 5036 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5037 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5038 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 5039 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5040 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5041 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 5042 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5043 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5044 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 5045 5046 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5047 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5048 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5049 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 5050 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5051 unsigned int link_id, int *dbm); 5052 5053 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5054 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5055 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 5056 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 5057 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 5058 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5059 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5060 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 5061 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5062 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5063 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 5064 5065 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5066 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 5067 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5068 5069 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5070 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5071 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 5072 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5073 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5074 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5075 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5076 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 5077 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5078 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5079 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 5080 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5081 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5082 u8 instance_id); 5083 int (*nan_peer_sched_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5084 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 5085 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5086 struct sk_buff *head, 5087 struct sk_buff *skb); 5088 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5089 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5090 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 5091 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5092 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 5093 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5094 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 5095 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5096 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5097 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5098 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 5099 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5100 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5101 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 5102 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5103 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5104 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5105 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 5106 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5107 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar); 5108 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5109 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5110 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 5111 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5112 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5113 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt); 5114 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5115 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid); 5116 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5117 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 5118 int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5119 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5120 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5121 struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx, 5122 struct net_device_path *path); 5123 bool (*can_activate_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5124 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5125 u16 active_links); 5126 int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5127 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5128 u16 old_links, u16 new_links, 5129 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]); 5130 int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5131 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5132 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5133 u16 old_links, u16 new_links); 5134 int (*set_hw_timestamp)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5135 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5136 struct cfg80211_set_hw_timestamp *hwts); 5137 int (*net_setup_tc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5138 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5139 struct net_device *dev, 5140 enum tc_setup_type type, 5141 void *type_data); 5142 enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res 5143 (*can_neg_ttlm)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5144 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm *ttlm); 5145 void (*prep_add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5146 enum nl80211_iftype type); 5147 int (*set_eml_op_mode)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5148 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5149 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5150 struct ieee80211_eml_params *eml_params); 5151 }; 5152 5153 /** 5154 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 5155 * 5156 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 5157 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 5158 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 5159 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 5160 * @priv_data_len. 5161 * 5162 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 5163 * @ops: callbacks for this device 5164 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 5165 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 5166 * 5167 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 5168 */ 5169 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 5170 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 5171 const char *requested_name); 5172 5173 /** 5174 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 5175 * 5176 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 5177 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 5178 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 5179 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 5180 * @priv_data_len. 5181 * 5182 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 5183 * @ops: callbacks for this device 5184 * 5185 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 5186 */ 5187 static inline 5188 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 5189 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 5190 { 5191 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 5192 } 5193 5194 /** 5195 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 5196 * 5197 * You must call this function before any other functions in 5198 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 5199 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 5200 * 5201 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5202 * 5203 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 5204 */ 5205 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5206 5207 /** 5208 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 5209 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 5210 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 5211 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 5212 */ 5213 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 5214 int throughput; 5215 int blink_time; 5216 }; 5217 5218 /** 5219 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 5220 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 5221 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 5222 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 5223 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 5224 */ 5225 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 5226 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 5227 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 5228 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 5229 }; 5230 5231 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5232 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5233 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5234 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5235 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5236 const char * 5237 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5238 unsigned int flags, 5239 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 5240 unsigned int blink_table_len); 5241 #endif 5242 /** 5243 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 5244 * 5245 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5246 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5247 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5248 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5249 * 5250 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5251 * 5252 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5253 */ 5254 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5255 { 5256 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5257 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 5258 #else 5259 return NULL; 5260 #endif 5261 } 5262 5263 /** 5264 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 5265 * 5266 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5267 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5268 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5269 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5270 * 5271 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5272 * 5273 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5274 */ 5275 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5276 { 5277 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5278 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 5279 #else 5280 return NULL; 5281 #endif 5282 } 5283 5284 /** 5285 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 5286 * 5287 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5288 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5289 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5290 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5291 * 5292 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5293 * 5294 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5295 */ 5296 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5297 { 5298 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5299 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 5300 #else 5301 return NULL; 5302 #endif 5303 } 5304 5305 /** 5306 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 5307 * 5308 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5309 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5310 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5311 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5312 * 5313 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5314 * 5315 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5316 */ 5317 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5318 { 5319 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5320 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 5321 #else 5322 return NULL; 5323 #endif 5324 } 5325 5326 /** 5327 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 5328 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 5329 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 5330 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 5331 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 5332 * 5333 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 5334 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 5335 * 5336 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 5337 */ 5338 static inline const char * 5339 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 5340 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 5341 unsigned int blink_table_len) 5342 { 5343 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5344 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 5345 blink_table_len); 5346 #else 5347 return NULL; 5348 #endif 5349 } 5350 5351 /** 5352 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 5353 * 5354 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 5355 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 5356 * 5357 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 5358 */ 5359 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5360 5361 /** 5362 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 5363 * 5364 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 5365 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 5366 * before calling this function. 5367 * 5368 * @hw: the hardware to free 5369 */ 5370 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5371 5372 /** 5373 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 5374 * 5375 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 5376 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 5377 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 5378 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 5379 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 5380 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 5381 * 5382 * @hw: the hardware to restart 5383 */ 5384 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5385 5386 /** 5387 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list 5388 * 5389 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5390 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5391 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5392 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5393 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5394 * 5395 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5396 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5397 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5398 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5399 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5400 * 5401 * For data frames, when hardware has done address translation, a link station 5402 * has to be provided and the frequency information may be skipped. 5403 * 5404 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock 5405 * 5406 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5407 * @link_sta: the link station the data frame was received from, or %NULL 5408 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5409 * @list: the destination list 5410 */ 5411 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5412 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 5413 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list); 5414 5415 /** 5416 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 5417 * 5418 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5419 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5420 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5421 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5422 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5423 * 5424 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5425 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5426 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5427 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5428 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5429 * 5430 * For data frames, when hardware has done address translation, a link station 5431 * has to be provided and the frequency information may be skipped. 5432 * 5433 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 5434 * 5435 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5436 * @link_sta: the link station the data frame was received from, or %NULL 5437 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5438 * @napi: the NAPI context 5439 */ 5440 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5441 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 5442 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 5443 5444 /** 5445 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 5446 * 5447 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5448 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5449 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5450 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5451 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5452 * 5453 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5454 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5455 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5456 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5457 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5458 * 5459 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5460 * 5461 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5462 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5463 */ 5464 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 5465 { 5466 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 5467 } 5468 5469 /** 5470 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 5471 * 5472 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 5473 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5474 * 5475 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 5476 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 5477 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5478 * 5479 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5480 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5481 */ 5482 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 5483 5484 /** 5485 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 5486 * 5487 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 5488 * (internally disables bottom halves). 5489 * 5490 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 5491 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5492 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5493 * 5494 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5495 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5496 */ 5497 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5498 struct sk_buff *skb) 5499 { 5500 local_bh_disable(); 5501 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 5502 local_bh_enable(); 5503 } 5504 5505 /** 5506 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 5507 * 5508 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 5509 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 5510 * entering/leaving PS mode. 5511 * 5512 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 5513 * 5514 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 5515 * each other. 5516 * 5517 * @sta: currently connected sta 5518 * @start: start or stop PS 5519 */ 5520 void ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 5521 5522 /** 5523 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 5524 * (in process context) 5525 * 5526 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 5527 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 5528 * applies. 5529 * 5530 * @sta: currently connected sta 5531 * @start: start or stop PS 5532 */ 5533 static inline void ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5534 bool start) 5535 { 5536 local_bh_disable(); 5537 ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 5538 local_bh_enable(); 5539 } 5540 5541 /** 5542 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 5543 * @sta: currently connected station 5544 * 5545 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 5546 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 5547 * connected station was received. 5548 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 5549 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 5550 * be serialized. 5551 */ 5552 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 5553 5554 /** 5555 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 5556 * @sta: currently connected station 5557 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 5558 * 5559 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 5560 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 5561 * from a connected station was received. 5562 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 5563 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 5564 * serialized. 5565 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 5566 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 5567 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 5568 * checks. 5569 */ 5570 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 5571 5572 /* 5573 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 5574 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 5575 */ 5576 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 5577 5578 /** 5579 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 5580 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 5581 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 5582 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 5583 * 5584 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 5585 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 5586 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 5587 * 5588 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 5589 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 5590 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 5591 * call! Beware of the locking!) 5592 * 5593 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 5594 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 5595 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 5596 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 5597 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 5598 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 5599 * 5600 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 5601 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 5602 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 5603 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 5604 * use this API. 5605 */ 5606 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5607 u8 tid, bool buffered); 5608 5609 /** 5610 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 5611 * 5612 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 5613 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 5614 * rate selection table for the station entry. 5615 * 5616 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5617 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 5618 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 5619 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 5620 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 5621 */ 5622 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5623 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5624 struct sk_buff *skb, 5625 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 5626 int max_rates); 5627 5628 /** 5629 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 5630 * 5631 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 5632 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 5633 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 5634 * 5635 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5636 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 5637 * @info: tx status information 5638 */ 5639 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5640 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5641 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 5642 5643 /** 5644 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb - transmit status callback 5645 * 5646 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 5647 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 5648 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 5649 * 5650 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5651 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 5652 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 5653 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5654 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5655 * 5656 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5657 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5658 */ 5659 void ieee80211_tx_status_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5660 struct sk_buff *skb); 5661 5662 /** 5663 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 5664 * 5665 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb() 5666 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 5667 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 5668 * 5669 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5670 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5671 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5672 * 5673 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5674 * @status: tx status information 5675 */ 5676 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5677 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 5678 5679 /** 5680 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 5681 * 5682 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb() 5683 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 5684 * specific skbs. 5685 * 5686 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5687 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5688 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5689 * 5690 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5691 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 5692 * (NULL for multicast packets) 5693 * @info: tx status information 5694 */ 5695 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5696 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5697 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 5698 { 5699 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 5700 .sta = sta, 5701 .info = info, 5702 }; 5703 5704 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 5705 } 5706 5707 /** 5708 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 5709 * 5710 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in process context. 5711 * 5712 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and 5713 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 5714 * for a single hardware. 5715 * 5716 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5717 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5718 */ 5719 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5720 struct sk_buff *skb) 5721 { 5722 local_bh_disable(); 5723 ieee80211_tx_status_skb(hw, skb); 5724 local_bh_enable(); 5725 } 5726 5727 /** 5728 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 5729 * 5730 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in IRQ context 5731 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5732 * 5733 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and 5734 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5735 * 5736 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5737 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5738 */ 5739 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5740 struct sk_buff *skb); 5741 5742 /** 5743 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 5744 * 5745 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 5746 * connected STA. 5747 * 5748 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 5749 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 5750 */ 5751 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 5752 5753 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2 5754 5755 /** 5756 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 5757 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 5758 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 5759 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 5760 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which 5761 * should be ignored. 5762 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element 5763 */ 5764 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 5765 u16 tim_offset; 5766 u16 tim_length; 5767 5768 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM]; 5769 u16 mbssid_off; 5770 }; 5771 5772 /** 5773 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 5774 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5775 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5776 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5777 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5778 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5779 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5780 * 5781 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5782 * obtain the beacon template. 5783 * 5784 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 5785 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 5786 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 5787 * applicable, the CSA count. 5788 * 5789 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5790 * 5791 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5792 */ 5793 struct sk_buff * 5794 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5795 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5796 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5797 unsigned int link_id); 5798 5799 /** 5800 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index - EMA beacon template generation 5801 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5802 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5803 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5804 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5805 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP). 5806 * @ema_index: index of the beacon in the EMA set. 5807 * 5808 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template() 5809 * but returns a beacon template which includes multiple BSSID element at the 5810 * requested index. 5811 * 5812 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL indicates the end of EMA templates. 5813 */ 5814 struct sk_buff * 5815 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5816 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5817 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5818 unsigned int link_id, u8 ema_index); 5819 5820 /** 5821 * struct ieee80211_ema_beacons - List of EMA beacons 5822 * @cnt: count of EMA beacons. 5823 * 5824 * @bcn: array of EMA beacons. 5825 * @bcn.skb: the skb containing this specific beacon 5826 * @bcn.offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5827 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5828 */ 5829 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons { 5830 u8 cnt; 5831 struct { 5832 struct sk_buff *skb; 5833 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets offs; 5834 } bcn[]; 5835 }; 5836 5837 /** 5838 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list - EMA beacon template generation 5839 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5840 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5841 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5842 * 5843 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template() 5844 * but allocates and returns a pointer to list of all beacon templates required 5845 * to cover all profiles in the multiple BSSID set. Each template includes only 5846 * one multiple BSSID element. 5847 * 5848 * Driver must call ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list() to free the memory. 5849 * 5850 * Return: EMA beacon templates of type struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *. 5851 * %NULL on error. 5852 */ 5853 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons * 5854 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5855 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5856 unsigned int link_id); 5857 5858 /** 5859 * ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list - free an EMA beacon template list 5860 * @ema_beacons: list of EMA beacons of type &struct ieee80211_ema_beacons pointers. 5861 * 5862 * This function will free a list previously acquired by calling 5863 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list() 5864 */ 5865 void ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list(struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *ema_beacons); 5866 5867 /** 5868 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 5869 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5870 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5871 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 5872 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5873 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 5874 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 5875 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5876 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5877 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5878 * 5879 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5880 * obtain the beacon frame. 5881 * 5882 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5883 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 5884 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 5885 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 5886 * 5887 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5888 * 5889 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5890 */ 5891 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5892 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5893 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length, 5894 unsigned int link_id); 5895 5896 /** 5897 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 5898 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5899 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5900 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5901 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5902 * 5903 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5904 * 5905 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5906 */ 5907 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5908 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5909 unsigned int link_id) 5910 { 5911 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id); 5912 } 5913 5914 /** 5915 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown 5916 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5917 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5918 * 5919 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 5920 * This function is called implicitly when 5921 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 5922 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 5923 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown. 5924 * 5925 * Return: new countdown value 5926 */ 5927 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5928 unsigned int link_id); 5929 5930 /** 5931 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown 5932 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5933 * @counter: the new value for the counter 5934 * 5935 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be 5936 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 5937 * 5938 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(), 5939 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 5940 */ 5941 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 5942 5943 /** 5944 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 5945 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5946 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5947 * 5948 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5949 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5950 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 5951 */ 5952 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id); 5953 5954 /** 5955 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1 5956 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5957 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5958 * 5959 * Return: %true if the countdown reached 1, %false otherwise 5960 */ 5961 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5962 unsigned int link_id); 5963 5964 /** 5965 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change 5966 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5967 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5968 * 5969 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5970 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5971 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed 5972 */ 5973 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 link_id); 5974 5975 /** 5976 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 5977 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5978 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5979 * 5980 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5981 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 5982 * 5983 * Can only be called in AP mode. 5984 * 5985 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 5986 */ 5987 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5988 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5989 5990 /** 5991 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 5992 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5993 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5994 * 5995 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 5996 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5997 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 5998 * 5999 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 6000 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 6001 * 6002 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 6003 */ 6004 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6005 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6006 6007 /** 6008 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 6009 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6010 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6011 * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses 6012 * for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with 6013 * MLD addresses, however useful that might be. 6014 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 6015 * if at all possible 6016 * 6017 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 6018 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 6019 * BSSID and address is used. 6020 * 6021 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 6022 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 6023 * 6024 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 6025 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 6026 * 6027 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 6028 */ 6029 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6030 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6031 int link_id, bool qos_ok); 6032 6033 /** 6034 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 6035 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6036 * @src_addr: source MAC address 6037 * @ssid: SSID buffer 6038 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 6039 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 6040 * 6041 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 6042 * hardware. 6043 * 6044 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 6045 */ 6046 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6047 const u8 *src_addr, 6048 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 6049 size_t tailroom); 6050 6051 /** 6052 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 6053 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6054 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6055 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 6056 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 6057 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6058 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 6059 * 6060 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 6061 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 6062 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 6063 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 6064 */ 6065 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6066 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 6067 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 6068 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 6069 6070 /** 6071 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 6072 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6073 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6074 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 6075 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6076 * 6077 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 6078 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 6079 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 6080 * 6081 * Return: The duration. 6082 */ 6083 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6084 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 6085 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 6086 6087 /** 6088 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 6089 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6090 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6091 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 6092 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 6093 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6094 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 6095 * 6096 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 6097 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 6098 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 6099 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 6100 */ 6101 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6102 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6103 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 6104 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 6105 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 6106 6107 /** 6108 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 6109 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6110 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6111 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 6112 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6113 * 6114 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 6115 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 6116 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 6117 * 6118 * Return: The duration. 6119 */ 6120 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6121 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6122 size_t frame_len, 6123 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 6124 6125 /** 6126 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 6127 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6128 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6129 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 6130 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 6131 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 6132 * 6133 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 6134 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 6135 * 6136 * Return: The duration. 6137 */ 6138 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6139 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6140 enum nl80211_band band, 6141 size_t frame_len, 6142 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 6143 6144 /** 6145 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 6146 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6147 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6148 * 6149 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 6150 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 6151 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 6152 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 6153 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 6154 * 6155 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 6156 * frames are available. 6157 * 6158 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 6159 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 6160 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 6161 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 6162 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 6163 * use common code for all beacons. 6164 */ 6165 struct sk_buff * 6166 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6167 6168 /** 6169 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 6170 * 6171 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 6172 * 6173 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6174 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 6175 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 6176 */ 6177 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6178 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 6179 6180 /** 6181 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 6182 * 6183 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 6184 * from the given packet. 6185 * 6186 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6187 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 6188 * with this P1K 6189 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 6190 */ 6191 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6192 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 6193 { 6194 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 6195 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 6196 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 6197 6198 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 6199 } 6200 6201 /** 6202 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 6203 * 6204 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 6205 * and transmitter address. 6206 * 6207 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6208 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 6209 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 6210 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 6211 */ 6212 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6213 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 6214 6215 /** 6216 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 6217 * 6218 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 6219 * in the packet. 6220 * 6221 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6222 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 6223 * encrypted with this key 6224 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 6225 */ 6226 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6227 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 6228 6229 /** 6230 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 6231 * 6232 * @pos: start of crypto header 6233 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6234 * @pn: PN to add 6235 * 6236 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 6237 * the packet payload) 6238 * 6239 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 6240 * point to the crypto header) 6241 */ 6242 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 6243 6244 /** 6245 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 6246 * 6247 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6248 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 6249 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 6250 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 6251 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 6252 * 6253 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 6254 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 6255 * by the device and not by mac80211. 6256 * 6257 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 6258 * can be done concurrently. 6259 */ 6260 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6261 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 6262 6263 /** 6264 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 6265 * 6266 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6267 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 6268 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 6269 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 6270 * @seq: new sequence data 6271 * 6272 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 6273 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 6274 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 6275 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 6276 * 6277 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 6278 * can be done concurrently. 6279 */ 6280 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6281 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 6282 6283 /** 6284 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 6285 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 6286 * @idx: the keyidx of the key 6287 * @key_data: the key data 6288 * @key_len: the key data. Might be bigger than the actual key length, 6289 * but not smaller (for the driver convinence) 6290 * @link_id: the link id of the key or -1 for non-MLO 6291 * @cigtk: whether this is a CIGTK 6292 * 6293 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 6294 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 6295 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 6296 * 6297 * Return: the newly allocated key structure, which will have 6298 * similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 6299 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 6300 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 6301 * 6302 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 6303 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 6304 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 6305 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 6306 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 6307 * of the reconfiguration. 6308 * 6309 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 6310 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 6311 * 6312 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 6313 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. 6314 */ 6315 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 6316 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6317 u8 idx, u8 *key_data, u8 key_len, 6318 int link_id, bool cigtk); 6319 6320 /** 6321 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 6322 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 6323 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 6324 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 6325 * @gfp: allocation flags 6326 */ 6327 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 6328 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 6329 6330 /** 6331 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key 6332 * 6333 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 6334 * at the same time. 6335 * 6336 * @keyconf: the key in question 6337 */ 6338 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 6339 6340 /** 6341 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key 6342 * 6343 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 6344 * at the same time. 6345 * 6346 * @keyconf: the key in question 6347 */ 6348 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 6349 6350 /** 6351 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 6352 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6353 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6354 * 6355 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 6356 */ 6357 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6358 6359 /** 6360 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 6361 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6362 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6363 * 6364 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 6365 */ 6366 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6367 6368 /** 6369 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 6370 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6371 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6372 * 6373 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_queue_stopped. 6374 * 6375 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 6376 */ 6377 6378 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6379 6380 /** 6381 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 6382 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6383 * 6384 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_stop_all_queues. 6385 */ 6386 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6387 6388 /** 6389 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 6390 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6391 * 6392 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_wake_all_queues. 6393 */ 6394 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6395 6396 /** 6397 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 6398 * 6399 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 6400 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 6401 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 6402 * any context, including hardirq context. 6403 * 6404 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 6405 * @info: information about the completed scan 6406 */ 6407 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6408 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 6409 6410 /** 6411 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 6412 * 6413 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 6414 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 6415 * 6416 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 6417 */ 6418 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6419 6420 /** 6421 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 6422 * 6423 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 6424 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 6425 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 6426 * while associating, for instance. 6427 * 6428 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 6429 */ 6430 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6431 6432 /** 6433 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 6434 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 6435 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 6436 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 6437 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 6438 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 6439 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 6440 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 6441 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 6442 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA 6443 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery 6444 * for instance. 6445 */ 6446 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 6447 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 6448 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 6449 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 6450 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2), 6451 }; 6452 6453 /** 6454 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 6455 * 6456 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6457 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 6458 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 6459 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6460 * 6461 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6462 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6463 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6464 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6465 */ 6466 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 6467 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6468 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6469 void *data); 6470 6471 /** 6472 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 6473 * 6474 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6475 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6476 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 6477 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 6478 * be used. 6479 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6480 * 6481 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6482 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6483 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6484 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6485 */ 6486 static inline void 6487 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 6488 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6489 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6490 void *data) 6491 { 6492 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 6493 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 6494 iterator, data); 6495 } 6496 6497 /** 6498 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 6499 * 6500 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6501 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6502 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 6503 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 6504 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6505 * 6506 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6507 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6508 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6509 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6510 */ 6511 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6512 u32 iter_flags, 6513 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6514 u8 *mac, 6515 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6516 void *data); 6517 6518 struct ieee80211_vif * 6519 __ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6520 struct ieee80211_vif *prev, 6521 u32 iter_flags); 6522 6523 /** 6524 * for_each_interface - iterate interfaces under wiphy mutex 6525 * @vif: the iterator variable 6526 * @hw: the HW to iterate for 6527 * @flags: the iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6528 */ 6529 #define for_each_interface(vif, hw, flags) \ 6530 for (vif = __ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, NULL, flags); \ 6531 vif; \ 6532 vif = __ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, vif, flags)) 6533 6534 /** 6535 * for_each_active_interface - iterate active interfaces under wiphy mutex 6536 * @vif: the iterator variable 6537 * @hw: the HW to iterate for 6538 */ 6539 #define for_each_active_interface(vif, hw) \ 6540 for_each_interface(vif, hw, IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE) 6541 6542 /** 6543 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces 6544 * 6545 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6546 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6547 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex. 6548 * 6549 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6550 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6551 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6552 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6553 */ 6554 static inline void 6555 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6556 u32 iter_flags, 6557 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6558 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6559 void *data) 6560 { 6561 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 6562 6563 for_each_interface(vif, hw, iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE) 6564 iterator(data, vif->addr, vif); 6565 } 6566 6567 /** 6568 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 6569 * 6570 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 6571 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 6572 * function for them. 6573 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 6574 * 6575 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6576 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6577 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6578 */ 6579 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6580 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6581 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 6582 void *data); 6583 6584 struct ieee80211_sta * 6585 __ieee80211_iterate_stations(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6586 struct ieee80211_sta *prev); 6587 6588 /** 6589 * for_each_station - iterate stations under wiphy mutex 6590 * @sta: the iterator variable 6591 * @hw: the HW to iterate for 6592 */ 6593 #define for_each_station(sta, hw) \ 6594 for (sta = __ieee80211_iterate_stations(hw, NULL); \ 6595 sta; \ 6596 sta = __ieee80211_iterate_stations(hw, sta)) 6597 6598 /** 6599 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_mtx - iterate stations 6600 * 6601 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 6602 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 6603 * function for them. This version can only be used while holding the wiphy 6604 * mutex. 6605 * 6606 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6607 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6608 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6609 */ 6610 static inline void 6611 ieee80211_iterate_stations_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6612 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6613 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 6614 void *data) 6615 { 6616 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 6617 6618 for_each_station(sta, hw) 6619 iterator(data, sta); 6620 } 6621 6622 /** 6623 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 6624 * 6625 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 6626 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 6627 * 6628 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 6629 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 6630 */ 6631 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 6632 6633 /** 6634 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 6635 * 6636 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 6637 * workqueue. 6638 * 6639 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 6640 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 6641 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 6642 */ 6643 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6644 struct delayed_work *dwork, 6645 unsigned long delay); 6646 6647 /** 6648 * ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer - Refresh a tx agg session timer. 6649 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 6650 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6651 * 6652 * This function allows low level driver to refresh tx agg session timer 6653 * to maintain BA session, the session level will still be managed by the 6654 * mac80211. 6655 * 6656 * Note: must be called in an RCU critical section. 6657 */ 6658 void ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6659 u16 tid); 6660 6661 /** 6662 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 6663 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 6664 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6665 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 6666 * 6667 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 6668 * 6669 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6670 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6671 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6672 */ 6673 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 6674 u16 timeout); 6675 6676 /** 6677 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 6678 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6679 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6680 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6681 * 6682 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6683 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 6684 * from any context. 6685 */ 6686 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6687 u16 tid); 6688 6689 /** 6690 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 6691 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 6692 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 6693 * 6694 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 6695 * 6696 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6697 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6698 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6699 */ 6700 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 6701 6702 /** 6703 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 6704 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6705 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6706 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 6707 * 6708 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6709 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 6710 * can be called from any context. 6711 */ 6712 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6713 u16 tid); 6714 6715 /** 6716 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 6717 * 6718 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 6719 * @addr: station's address 6720 * 6721 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6722 * 6723 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6724 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6725 */ 6726 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6727 const u8 *addr); 6728 6729 /** 6730 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 6731 * 6732 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6733 * @addr: remote station's address 6734 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 6735 * 6736 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6737 * 6738 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6739 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6740 * 6741 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 6742 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 6743 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 6744 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 6745 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 6746 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 6747 * is not reliable. 6748 * 6749 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 6750 */ 6751 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6752 const u8 *addr, 6753 const u8 *localaddr); 6754 6755 /** 6756 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses 6757 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6758 * @addr: remote station's link address 6759 * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that) 6760 * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found, 6761 * may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed 6762 * 6763 * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection. 6764 * 6765 * Return: pointer to STA if found, otherwise %NULL. 6766 */ 6767 struct ieee80211_sta * 6768 ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6769 const u8 *addr, 6770 const u8 *localaddr, 6771 unsigned int *link_id); 6772 6773 /** 6774 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 6775 * @hw: the hardware 6776 * @pubsta: the station 6777 * @block: whether to block or unblock 6778 * 6779 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 6780 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 6781 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 6782 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 6783 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 6784 * 6785 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 6786 * manner. 6787 * 6788 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 6789 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 6790 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 6791 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 6792 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 6793 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 6794 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 6795 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 6796 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 6797 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 6798 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 6799 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 6800 * woke up while blocked or not. 6801 */ 6802 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6803 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 6804 6805 /** 6806 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 6807 * @pubsta: the station 6808 * 6809 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 6810 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 6811 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 6812 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 6813 * 6814 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 6815 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 6816 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 6817 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 6818 * 6819 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 6820 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 6821 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 6822 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 6823 */ 6824 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6825 6826 /** 6827 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 6828 * @pubsta: the station 6829 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 6830 * 6831 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 6832 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 6833 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 6834 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 6835 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 6836 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 6837 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 6838 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 6839 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 6840 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 6841 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 6842 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 6843 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 6844 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 6845 */ 6846 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 6847 6848 /** 6849 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change 6850 * @pubsta: the station 6851 * 6852 * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in 6853 * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of 6854 * &struct ieee80211_link_sta. 6855 * 6856 * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case 6857 * there is no need to call this function. 6858 */ 6859 void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6860 6861 /** 6862 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 6863 * 6864 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call 6865 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 6866 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 6867 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 6868 * 6869 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 6870 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 6871 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 6872 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 6873 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 6874 * attempts. 6875 * 6876 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 6877 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 6878 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 6879 * them to 0. 6880 * 6881 * @pubsta: the station 6882 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 6883 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 6884 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 6885 */ 6886 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6887 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 6888 6889 /** 6890 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 6891 * 6892 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6893 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6894 * 6895 * Return: %true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 6896 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return %false. 6897 */ 6898 bool 6899 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6900 6901 /** 6902 * ieee80211_txq_aql_pending - get pending AQL airtime for a txq 6903 * 6904 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6905 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6906 * 6907 * Return: pending airtime (in usec) for the given txq. 6908 */ 6909 u32 ieee80211_txq_aql_pending(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6910 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6911 6912 /** 6913 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 6914 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6915 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6916 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6917 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6918 * 6919 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held; can sleep. 6920 * 6921 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6922 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6923 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 6924 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. 6925 * 6926 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 6927 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 6928 * set_key callback. 6929 */ 6930 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6931 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6932 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6933 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6934 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6935 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6936 void *data), 6937 void *iter_data); 6938 6939 /** 6940 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 6941 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6942 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6943 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6944 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6945 * 6946 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6947 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6948 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 6949 * in removal process will be skipped. 6950 * 6951 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 6952 * and thus iter must be atomic. 6953 */ 6954 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6955 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6956 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6957 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6958 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6959 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6960 void *data), 6961 void *iter_data); 6962 6963 /** 6964 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 6965 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6966 * @iter: iterator function 6967 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 6968 * 6969 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 6970 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 6971 * places while calling into the driver. 6972 * 6973 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 6974 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 6975 * removed. 6976 * 6977 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 6978 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 6979 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 6980 * or not. 6981 */ 6982 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 6983 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6984 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6985 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 6986 void *data), 6987 void *iter_data); 6988 6989 /** 6990 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_mtx - iterate channel contexts 6991 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6992 * @iter: iterator function 6993 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 6994 * 6995 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function can only be used while 6996 * holding the wiphy mutex. 6997 * 6998 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 6999 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 7000 * removed. 7001 * 7002 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 7003 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 7004 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 7005 * or not. 7006 */ 7007 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_mtx( 7008 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7009 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7010 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 7011 void *data), 7012 void *iter_data); 7013 7014 /** 7015 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 7016 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7017 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7018 * 7019 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 7020 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 7021 * information. This function must only be called from within the 7022 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 7023 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 7024 * %NULL. 7025 * 7026 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 7027 */ 7028 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7029 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7030 7031 /** 7032 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 7033 * 7034 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7035 * 7036 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 7037 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 7038 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 7039 */ 7040 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7041 7042 /** 7043 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 7044 * 7045 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7046 * 7047 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 7048 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 7049 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 7050 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 7051 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 7052 * 7053 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 7054 * without connection recovery attempts. 7055 */ 7056 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7057 7058 /** 7059 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection 7060 * 7061 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7062 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired 7063 * 7064 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a 7065 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired. 7066 */ 7067 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect); 7068 7069 /** 7070 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 7071 * 7072 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7073 * 7074 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 7075 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 7076 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 7077 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 7078 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 7079 * 7080 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 7081 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 7082 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 7083 * disconnect normally later. 7084 * 7085 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 7086 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 7087 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 7088 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 7089 */ 7090 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7091 7092 /** 7093 * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after 7094 * hardware restart 7095 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7096 * 7097 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after 7098 * hardware restart. 7099 */ 7100 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7101 7102 /** 7103 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 7104 * rssi threshold triggered 7105 * 7106 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7107 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 7108 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 7109 * @gfp: context flags 7110 * 7111 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 7112 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 7113 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 7114 */ 7115 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7116 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 7117 s32 rssi_level, 7118 gfp_t gfp); 7119 7120 /** 7121 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 7122 * 7123 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7124 * @gfp: context flags 7125 */ 7126 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 7127 7128 /** 7129 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 7130 * 7131 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7132 * @chanctx_conf: Channel context on which radar is detected. Mandatory to 7133 * pass a valid pointer during MLO. For non-MLO %NULL can be passed 7134 */ 7135 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7136 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf); 7137 7138 /** 7139 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 7140 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7141 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 7142 * @link_id: the link_id on which the switch was done. Ignored if success is 7143 * false. 7144 * 7145 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 7146 * and wake up the suspended queues. 7147 */ 7148 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success, 7149 unsigned int link_id); 7150 7151 /** 7152 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error 7153 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7154 * 7155 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel 7156 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send 7157 * a deauth frame in this case. 7158 */ 7159 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7160 7161 /** 7162 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 7163 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7164 * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0 7165 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 7166 * 7167 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 7168 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 7169 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 7170 */ 7171 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 7172 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 7173 7174 /** 7175 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 7176 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7177 */ 7178 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 7179 7180 /** 7181 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 7182 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7183 */ 7184 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 7185 7186 /** 7187 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 7188 * 7189 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 7190 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 7191 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 7192 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 7193 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 7194 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 7195 * 7196 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7197 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 7198 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 7199 */ 7200 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 7201 const u8 *addr); 7202 7203 /** 7204 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 7205 * @pubsta: station struct 7206 * @tid: the session's TID 7207 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 7208 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 7209 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 7210 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 7211 * 7212 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 7213 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 7214 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 7215 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 7216 * (Only work correctly if @max_rx_aggregation_subframes <= 64 frames) 7217 */ 7218 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 7219 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 7220 u16 received_mpdus); 7221 7222 /** 7223 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 7224 * 7225 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 7226 * buffer. 7227 * 7228 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7229 * @ra: the peer's destination address 7230 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 7231 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 7232 */ 7233 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 7234 7235 /** 7236 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 7237 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 7238 * @addr: station mac address 7239 * @tid: the rx tid 7240 */ 7241 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 7242 unsigned int tid); 7243 7244 /** 7245 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 7246 * 7247 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 7248 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 7249 * reordering. 7250 * 7251 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 7252 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 7253 * 7254 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 7255 * @addr: station mac address 7256 * @tid: the rx tid 7257 */ 7258 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7259 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 7260 { 7261 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 7262 return; 7263 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 7264 } 7265 7266 /** 7267 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 7268 * 7269 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 7270 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 7271 * reordering. 7272 * 7273 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 7274 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 7275 * 7276 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 7277 * @addr: station mac address 7278 * @tid: the rx tid 7279 */ 7280 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7281 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 7282 { 7283 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 7284 return; 7285 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 7286 } 7287 7288 /** 7289 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 7290 * 7291 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 7292 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 7293 * 7294 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 7295 * 7296 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 7297 * @addr: station mac address 7298 * @tid: the rx tid 7299 */ 7300 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7301 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 7302 7303 /* Rate control API */ 7304 7305 /** 7306 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 7307 * 7308 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 7309 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 7310 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 7311 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 7312 * to be filled in 7313 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 7314 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 7315 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 7316 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 7317 * RTS threshold 7318 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 7319 * if the selected rate supports it 7320 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 7321 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 7322 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 7323 */ 7324 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 7325 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 7326 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 7327 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 7328 struct sk_buff *skb; 7329 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 7330 bool rts, short_preamble; 7331 u32 rate_idx_mask; 7332 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 7333 bool bss; 7334 }; 7335 7336 /** 7337 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 7338 */ 7339 enum rate_control_capabilities { 7340 /** 7341 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 7342 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 7343 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 7344 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 7345 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 7346 */ 7347 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 7348 /** 7349 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER: 7350 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx 7351 */ 7352 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1), 7353 }; 7354 7355 struct rate_control_ops { 7356 unsigned long capa; 7357 const char *name; 7358 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 7359 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv, 7360 struct dentry *debugfsdir); 7361 void (*free)(void *priv); 7362 7363 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 7364 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7365 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 7366 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 7367 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7368 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 7369 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7370 u32 changed); 7371 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 7372 void *priv_sta); 7373 7374 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 7375 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7376 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 7377 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7378 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7379 struct sk_buff *skb); 7380 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7381 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 7382 7383 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 7384 struct dentry *dir); 7385 7386 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 7387 }; 7388 7389 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 7390 enum nl80211_band band, 7391 int index) 7392 { 7393 return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 7394 } 7395 7396 static inline s8 7397 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7398 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 7399 { 7400 int i; 7401 7402 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 7403 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 7404 return i; 7405 7406 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 7407 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 7408 7409 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 7410 return 0; 7411 } 7412 7413 static inline 7414 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7415 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 7416 { 7417 unsigned int i; 7418 7419 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 7420 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 7421 return true; 7422 return false; 7423 } 7424 7425 /** 7426 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 7427 * 7428 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 7429 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 7430 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 7431 * the most recent rate control module decision. 7432 * 7433 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7434 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 7435 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 7436 * 7437 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 7438 */ 7439 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7440 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 7441 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 7442 7443 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 7444 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 7445 7446 static inline bool 7447 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7448 { 7449 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 7450 } 7451 7452 static inline bool 7453 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7454 { 7455 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 7456 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 7457 } 7458 7459 static inline bool 7460 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7461 { 7462 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 7463 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 7464 } 7465 7466 static inline bool 7467 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7468 { 7469 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 7470 } 7471 7472 static inline bool 7473 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7474 { 7475 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 7476 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 7477 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 7478 } 7479 7480 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 7481 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 7482 { 7483 if (p2p) { 7484 switch (type) { 7485 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 7486 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 7487 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 7488 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 7489 default: 7490 break; 7491 } 7492 } 7493 return type; 7494 } 7495 7496 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 7497 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7498 { 7499 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 7500 } 7501 7502 /** 7503 * ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif - return HE capabilities for sband/vif 7504 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 7505 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7506 * 7507 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap, or %NULL is none found 7508 */ 7509 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap * 7510 ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7511 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7512 { 7513 return ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7514 } 7515 7516 /** 7517 * ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif - return HE 6 GHz capabilities 7518 * @sband: the sband to search for the STA on 7519 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7520 * 7521 * Return: the 6GHz capabilities 7522 */ 7523 static inline __le16 7524 ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7525 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7526 { 7527 return ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7528 } 7529 7530 /** 7531 * ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif - return EHT capabilities for sband/vif 7532 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 7533 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7534 * 7535 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap, or %NULL is none found 7536 */ 7537 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap * 7538 ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7539 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7540 { 7541 return ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7542 } 7543 7544 /** 7545 * ieee80211_get_uhr_iftype_cap_vif - return UHR capabilities for sband/vif 7546 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 7547 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7548 * 7549 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_uhr_cap, or %NULL is none found 7550 */ 7551 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_uhr_cap * 7552 ieee80211_get_uhr_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7553 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7554 { 7555 return ieee80211_get_uhr_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7556 } 7557 7558 /** 7559 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 7560 * 7561 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 7562 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0 7563 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 7564 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 7565 * 7566 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 7567 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 7568 * matching GroupId management frame. 7569 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 7570 */ 7571 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 7572 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 7573 7574 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7575 int rssi_min_thold, 7576 int rssi_max_thold); 7577 7578 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7579 7580 /** 7581 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 7582 * 7583 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 7584 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, or -1 for non-MLO 7585 * 7586 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 7587 * 7588 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 7589 * applicable. 7590 */ 7591 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int link_id); 7592 7593 /** 7594 * ieee80211_calculate_rx_timestamp - calculate timestamp in frame 7595 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7596 * @status: RX status 7597 * @mpdu_len: total MPDU length (including FCS) 7598 * @mpdu_offset: offset into MPDU to calculate timestamp at 7599 * 7600 * This function calculates the RX timestamp at the given MPDU offset, taking 7601 * into account what the RX timestamp was. An offset of 0 will just normalize 7602 * the timestamp to TSF at beginning of MPDU reception. 7603 * 7604 * Returns: the calculated timestamp 7605 */ 7606 u64 ieee80211_calculate_rx_timestamp(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7607 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 7608 unsigned int mpdu_len, 7609 unsigned int mpdu_offset); 7610 7611 /** 7612 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 7613 * @vif: virtual interface 7614 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 7615 * @gfp: allocation flags 7616 * 7617 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 7618 */ 7619 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7620 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 7621 gfp_t gfp); 7622 7623 /** 7624 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 7625 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7626 * @vif: virtual interface 7627 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 7628 * @band: the band to transmit on 7629 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 7630 * 7631 * Return: %true if the skb was prepared, %false otherwise. 7632 * On failure, the skb is freed by this function; callers must not 7633 * free it again. 7634 * 7635 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 7636 */ 7637 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7638 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 7639 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 7640 7641 /** 7642 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header 7643 * of injected frames. 7644 * 7645 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields, 7646 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure 7647 * of the skb before calling this function. 7648 * 7649 * @skb: packet injected by userspace 7650 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 7651 * @chandef: the channel definition the frame will be transmitted on, or 7652 * %NULL to skip the bandwidth checks 7653 * @trim_fcs: trim the FCS trailer when present; validate it otherwise 7654 * 7655 * Return: %true if the radiotap header was parsed, %false otherwise 7656 */ 7657 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb, 7658 struct net_device *dev, 7659 const struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 7660 bool trim_fcs); 7661 7662 /** 7663 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 7664 * 7665 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 7666 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 7667 * 7668 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 7669 * 7670 * private: 7671 * 7672 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 7673 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 7674 */ 7675 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 7676 u32 next_tsf; 7677 bool has_next_tsf; 7678 7679 u8 absent; 7680 7681 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 7682 struct { 7683 u32 start; 7684 u32 duration; 7685 u32 interval; 7686 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 7687 }; 7688 7689 /** 7690 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 7691 * 7692 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 7693 * @data: NoA tracking data 7694 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 7695 * 7696 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 7697 */ 7698 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 7699 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 7700 7701 /** 7702 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 7703 * 7704 * @data: NoA tracking data 7705 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 7706 */ 7707 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 7708 7709 /** 7710 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 7711 * @vif: virtual interface 7712 * @peer: the peer's destination address 7713 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 7714 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 7715 * @gfp: allocation flags 7716 * 7717 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 7718 */ 7719 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 7720 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 7721 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 7722 7723 /** 7724 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 7725 * 7726 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 7727 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 7728 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 7729 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 7730 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 7731 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 7732 * 7733 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 7734 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 7735 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 7736 * 7737 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 7738 * @tid: the TID to reserve 7739 * 7740 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 7741 */ 7742 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 7743 7744 /** 7745 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 7746 * 7747 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 7748 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 7749 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 7750 * 7751 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 7752 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 7753 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 7754 * 7755 * @sta: the station 7756 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 7757 */ 7758 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 7759 7760 /** 7761 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 7762 * 7763 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7764 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 7765 * ieee80211_next_txq() 7766 * 7767 * Return: the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 7768 * 7769 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 7770 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 7771 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the 7772 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 7773 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 7774 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 7775 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 7776 * 7777 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 7778 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 7779 */ 7780 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7781 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7782 7783 /** 7784 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 7785 * (in process context) 7786 * 7787 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 7788 * (internally disables bottom halves). 7789 * 7790 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7791 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 7792 * ieee80211_next_txq() 7793 * 7794 * Return: the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 7795 */ 7796 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7797 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7798 { 7799 struct sk_buff *skb; 7800 7801 local_bh_disable(); 7802 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 7803 local_bh_enable(); 7804 7805 return skb; 7806 } 7807 7808 /** 7809 * ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue - mac80211 handler for wake_tx_queue callback 7810 * 7811 * @hw: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 7812 * @txq: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 7813 * 7814 * Drivers can use this function for the mandatory mac80211 wake_tx_queue 7815 * callback in struct ieee80211_ops. They should not call this function. 7816 */ 7817 void ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7818 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7819 7820 /** 7821 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 7822 * 7823 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7824 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 7825 * 7826 * Return: the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 7827 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 7828 * driver has finished scheduling it. 7829 */ 7830 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7831 7832 /** 7833 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 7834 * 7835 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7836 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 7837 * 7838 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 7839 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 7840 */ 7841 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7842 7843 /* (deprecated) */ 7844 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 7845 { 7846 } 7847 7848 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7849 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 7850 7851 /** 7852 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 7853 * 7854 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7855 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7856 * 7857 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 7858 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 7859 * 7860 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 7861 * this TXQ internally. 7862 */ 7863 static inline void 7864 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7865 { 7866 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 7867 } 7868 7869 /** 7870 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 7871 * 7872 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7873 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7874 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 7875 * 7876 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 7877 * internally. 7878 */ 7879 static inline void 7880 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7881 bool force) 7882 { 7883 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 7884 } 7885 7886 /** 7887 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 7888 * 7889 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 7890 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 7891 * fairness accounting without using the scheduling order enforced by 7892 * next_txq(). 7893 * 7894 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 7895 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 7896 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 7897 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 7898 * again. 7899 * 7900 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 7901 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 7902 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 7903 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 7904 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 7905 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 7906 * 7907 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7908 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7909 * 7910 * Return: %true if transmission is allowed, %false otherwise 7911 */ 7912 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7913 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7914 7915 /** 7916 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 7917 * 7918 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 7919 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 7920 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 7921 * 7922 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7923 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 7924 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 7925 */ 7926 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7927 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 7928 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 7929 7930 /** 7931 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 7932 * 7933 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 7934 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7935 * 7936 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7937 * @inst_id: the local instance id 7938 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 7939 * @gfp: allocation flags 7940 */ 7941 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7942 u8 inst_id, 7943 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 7944 gfp_t gfp); 7945 7946 /** 7947 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 7948 * 7949 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 7950 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 7951 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7952 * 7953 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7954 * @match: match event information 7955 * @gfp: allocation flags 7956 */ 7957 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7958 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 7959 gfp_t gfp); 7960 7961 /** 7962 * ieee80211_nan_sched_update_done - notify that NAN schedule update is done 7963 * 7964 * This function is called by the driver to notify mac80211 that the NAN 7965 * schedule update has been applied. 7966 * Must be called with wiphy mutex held. May sleep. 7967 * 7968 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7969 */ 7970 void ieee80211_nan_sched_update_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7971 7972 /** 7973 * ieee80211_nan_cluster_joined - notify about NAN cluster join. 7974 * 7975 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN cluster join. 7976 * 7977 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7978 * @cluster_id: the cluster ID that was joined 7979 * @new_cluster: true if this is a new cluster 7980 * @gfp: allocation flags 7981 */ 7982 void ieee80211_nan_cluster_joined(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7983 const u8 *cluster_id, bool new_cluster, 7984 gfp_t gfp); 7985 7986 /** 7987 * ieee80211_nan_try_evacuate - try to evacuate a NAN channel 7988 * 7989 * This function tries to evacuate a NAN channel that is using the given 7990 * channel context, to free up channel context resources. 7991 * 7992 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7993 * @conf: the channel context configuration to try to evacuate. If %NULL, 7994 * the NAN channel that has the fewest slots scheduled will be evacuated. 7995 * 7996 * Return: %true if a channel was evacuated, %false otherwise 7997 */ 7998 bool ieee80211_nan_try_evacuate(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7999 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *conf); 8000 8001 /** 8002 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 8003 * 8004 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 8005 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 8006 * 8007 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 8008 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 8009 * information. 8010 * @len: frame length in bytes 8011 * 8012 * Return: the airtime estimate 8013 */ 8014 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8015 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 8016 int len); 8017 8018 /** 8019 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 8020 * 8021 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 8022 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 8023 * 8024 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 8025 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 8026 * @len: frame length in bytes 8027 * 8028 * Return: the airtime estimate 8029 */ 8030 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8031 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 8032 int len); 8033 /** 8034 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template. 8035 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 8036 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 8037 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO. 8038 * 8039 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 8040 * 8041 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error. 8042 */ 8043 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8044 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 8045 unsigned int link_id); 8046 8047 /** 8048 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast 8049 * probe response template. 8050 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 8051 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 8052 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO. 8053 * 8054 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 8055 * 8056 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error. 8057 */ 8058 struct sk_buff * 8059 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8060 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 8061 unsigned int link_id); 8062 8063 /** 8064 * ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color 8065 * collision. 8066 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 8067 * 8068 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 8069 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is 8070 * aware of. 8071 */ 8072 void 8073 ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 8074 u64 color_bitmap, u8 link_id); 8075 8076 /** 8077 * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode 8078 * @vif: interface to set active links on 8079 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 8080 * 8081 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held; may sleep; calls 8082 * back into the driver. 8083 * 8084 * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface 8085 * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active), 8086 * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links. 8087 * 8088 * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same 8089 * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get 8090 * a sequence of calls like 8091 * 8092 * - change_vif_links(0x11) 8093 * - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0) 8094 * - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4) 8095 * - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP) 8096 * (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down) 8097 * - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0) 8098 * - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4) 8099 * - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP) 8100 * - change_vif_links(0x10) 8101 * 8102 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 8103 */ 8104 int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links); 8105 8106 /** 8107 * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links 8108 * @vif: interface to set active links on 8109 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 8110 * 8111 * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only 8112 * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and 8113 * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be 8114 * completed after it returns. 8115 */ 8116 void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 8117 u16 active_links); 8118 8119 /** 8120 * ieee80211_send_teardown_neg_ttlm - tear down a negotiated TTLM request 8121 * @vif: the interface on which the tear down request should be sent. 8122 * 8123 * This function can be used to tear down a previously accepted negotiated 8124 * TTLM request. 8125 */ 8126 void ieee80211_send_teardown_neg_ttlm(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 8127 8128 /** 8129 * ieee80211_chan_width_to_rx_bw - convert channel width to STA RX bandwidth 8130 * @width: the channel width value to convert 8131 * Return: the STA RX bandwidth value for the channel width 8132 */ 8133 static inline enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth 8134 ieee80211_chan_width_to_rx_bw(enum nl80211_chan_width width) 8135 { 8136 switch (width) { 8137 default: 8138 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 8139 fallthrough; 8140 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT: 8141 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20: 8142 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20; 8143 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40: 8144 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40; 8145 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_80: 8146 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80; 8147 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_160: 8148 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_80P80: 8149 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160; 8150 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_320: 8151 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320; 8152 } 8153 } 8154 8155 /** 8156 * ieee80211_prepare_rx_omi_bw - prepare for sending BW RX OMI 8157 * @link_sta: the link STA the OMI is going to be sent to 8158 * @bw: the bandwidth requested 8159 * 8160 * When the driver decides to do RX OMI to change bandwidth with a STA 8161 * it calls this function to prepare, then sends the OMI, and finally 8162 * calls ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw(). 8163 * 8164 * Note that the (link) STA rate control is updated accordingly as well, 8165 * but the chanctx might not be updated if there are other users. 8166 * If the intention is to reduce the listen bandwidth, the driver must 8167 * ensure there are no TDLS stations nor other uses of the chanctx. 8168 * 8169 * Also note that in order to sequence correctly, narrowing bandwidth 8170 * will only happen in ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw(), whereas widening 8171 * again (e.g. going back to normal) will happen here. 8172 * 8173 * Note that we treat this symmetrically, so if the driver calls this 8174 * and tells the peer to only send with a lower bandwidth, we assume 8175 * that the driver also wants to only send at that lower bandwidth, to 8176 * allow narrowing of the chanctx request for this station/interface. 8177 * 8178 * Finally, the driver must ensure that if the function returned %true, 8179 * ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw() is also called, even for example in 8180 * case of HW restart. 8181 * 8182 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held, and will call back 8183 * into the driver, so ensure no driver locks are held. 8184 * 8185 * Return: %true if changes are going to be made, %false otherwise 8186 */ 8187 bool ieee80211_prepare_rx_omi_bw(struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 8188 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bw); 8189 8190 /** 8191 * ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw - finalize BW RX OMI update 8192 * @link_sta: the link STA the OMI was sent to 8193 * 8194 * See ieee80211_client_prepare_rx_omi_bw(). Context is the same here 8195 * as well. 8196 */ 8197 void ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw(struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta); 8198 8199 /* for older drivers - let's not document these ... */ 8200 int ieee80211_emulate_add_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8201 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 8202 void ieee80211_emulate_remove_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8203 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 8204 void ieee80211_emulate_change_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8205 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 8206 u32 changed); 8207 int ieee80211_emulate_switch_vif_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8208 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 8209 int n_vifs, 8210 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 8211 8212 /** 8213 * ieee80211_vif_nan_started - Return whether a NAN vif is started 8214 * @vif: the vif 8215 * Return: %true iff the vif is a NAN interface and NAN is started 8216 */ 8217 bool ieee80211_vif_nan_started(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 8218 8219 /** 8220 * ieee80211_encrypt_tx_skb - Encrypt the transmit skb 8221 * @skb: the skb 8222 * Return: 0 if success and non-zero on error 8223 */ 8224 int ieee80211_encrypt_tx_skb(struct sk_buff *skb); 8225 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 8226